Home

"user manual"

1. e lock or unlock the doors e recall memory features e enable and disable autolock and autounlock e program and erase user codes e arm and disarm the anti theft alarm The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create up to five of your own 5 digit personal entry codes Programming a Personal Entry Code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Press the 1e2 on the keypad within five seconds 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code You must enter each number within five seconds of each other 4 For memory recall feature enter the sixth digit 1e2 to store driver 1 settings or 3e4 to store driver 2 settings Note Pressing 5e6 7 8 or 9e0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that programming is complete You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch system Refer to the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch chapter Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing
2. Map dome lamp if equipped m The dome lamp lights when e any door is opened e the dome lamp button on the instrument panel is activated e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of the lens Rear courtesy lamp Located in the rear cargo area the courtesy lamp lights when e any door is opened e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Windows and Mirrors 95 POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press or lift the switches to operate the windows e Press the switch to the first detent and hold to open the window e Lift the switch to the first detent and hold to close the window Rear Window Buffeting You may hear a wind throb or buffeting noise when one or both of the rear windows are open This noise can be reduced by lowering a front window approximately 2 3 inches 5 8 centimeters One Touch Up or Down Front Windows This feature automatically opens or closes the window Press or lift the swi
3. Artist lt name gt audiobooks Audiobook lt name gt All audiobooks Audiobook i All authors Author lt name gt composers omposer lt name gt All p E p All folders Folder lt name gt All genres Genre lt name gt All movies Playlist lt name gt All music videos Podcast lt name gt All playlists TV show lt name gt All podcasts Video lt name gt All songs Video playlist lt name gt All TV shows Video podcast lt name gt All video playlists Help play p These commands are only available in USB mode and are device dependent Supported Media Players Formats and Metadata Information SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including iPod Zune M plays from device players and most USB drives Supported audio formats include MP3 WMA WAV and AAC It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by metadata tags Metadata tags which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files provide information about the file If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you MUST have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy fr
4. sss 392 Setting a destination 418 System settings ssss 406 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 456 Index T fluid checking and adding automatic i4 266 Temperature control fluid refill capacities 321 see Climate control 127 414 lubricant specifications 321 Text messaging 388 Turn signal iia 93 Tilt steering wheel 82 83 A 292 293 313 V A 126 377 charging soseastene 313 315 checking the pressure 302 V Anfang eat 300 or ger rU 299 Vehicle health report 402 NS 304 vehicle Identification a a e Number VIN ee 394 safety practices occ sidewall information 295 Vehicle loading RBS 213 snow tires and chains 307 Ventilating your vehicle 155 Spare LITE ias 313 Voi ua terminology ssssssss 294 D LE pe lire BIades eee 294 W Tread WEAF eeswuomees 293 302 Touchscreen features Warning lights see Lights 102 climate AAA EA TERT E ee 414 Washer fluid 268 TOWING i2 221 227 228 wy Drivi recreational towing 228 den da a aee aa trailer towing 221 Windows wrecker IA A CRM REPRE 227 power A A 95 rear wiper washer 88 Traction control TE P usd Traffic preferences vn IS aes T Trailer sway cont
5. 238 Roadside Emergencies Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery ji 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 1 ar 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the 3 4 assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the PA 2 nai gt gative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor or fuel injection system Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump Starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 239 Removing the Jumper Cables Note In the illustration the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting boosting battery Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface 2 Remove the jumper
6. 3 Power open the liftgate by using the transmitter or the instrument panel control button 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 76 Locks Manual Operation WARNING Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate door open keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air comes into the vehicle Note Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate Note Do not hang anything bike rack etc from the spoiler glass or liftgate This could damage the liftgate and its components Note Do not leave the liftgate open while driving This could damage to the liftgate and its components The liftgate area is only intended for cargo not passengers To open the liftgate Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate then pull on the outside If the liftgate is not fully latched you will receive a message information display Check the liftgate door to make sure it is fully latched In the event of a power failure the latch can be accessed and released from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Locks 77 SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD You can use the keypad to
7. LINCOLN lincolnowner com lincolncanada com November 2012 Third Printing Owner s Manual Lincoln MKX Litho in U S A DA1J 19A321 AA TE IVANVW S H3NMO LOZ 2013 OWNERS MANUAL LINCOLN MKX Table of Contents 1 Introduction 9 Child Safety 17 Child Seats a ida aaa lla de Ae EE wee ee A 19 Child seat positioning 55 4 ser eb a a ee Re eas 19 Booster seats eee eee 21 Installing child safety SeatS o ooooooooooooo 24 Child safety locks llle 31 Safety Belts 32 Fastening the safety belts 2l 34 Safety belt height adjustment 0 000000 eee eae 38 Safety belt warning light and indicator chime 38 Safety belt minder o o ooo oo eh 39 Child restraint and safety belt maintenance 41 Personal Safety System 42 Supplementary Restraints System 43 Driver and passenger airbags 000000 ee eee eee 45 Front passenger sensing system lese 47 Side alrDags 3 ean eek RUE Owed Bede had CRG ee eS 51 Safety canopy curtain airbags ooo es 52 Crash sensors and airbag indicator o o oo o o o o oo o o 54 Airbag disposal ovino teni es VRS IO S AY EE Ae ts 55 Keys and Remote Control 56 General information on radio frequencies o ooo oo 56 Remote Control spg pisaran cra adorada ando 57 Replacing a lost key or remote control o o ooo oo 62 2013 MKX mkx Owners
8. 5 Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next step 6 Return to your car 7 Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds then release Repeat this step Depending on your brand of garage door opener you may need to repeat this sequence a third time To program additional buttons repeat Steps 1 4 For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing the Function Button Codes JA 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Note You cannot erase individual buttons 1 Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly 2 When the indicator lights flash release the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased 146 Universal Garage Door Opener Reprogramming a single button To program a device to a previously trained button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Programming HomeLink to a Genie Intellicode 2 garage door opener Note The Genie Intellicode amp 2 transmitter must already
9. 62 Keys and Remote Control The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the radio will not turn on automatically The parking lamps will remain on and your vehicle will run for 5 10 or 15 minutes depending on the setting See the Information Displays chapter to select the duration of the remote start system Extending the Vehicle Run Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with your vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration If the duration is set to last 10 minutes the duration will extend by another 10 minutes beginning after what is left of the first activation time For example if your vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes your vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting Press the button once The parking lamps will turn off You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle You can disable or enable the remote start system through the information display Refer to the Information Display chapter REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from an authorized dealer A dealer can program the transmitters to your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself See
10. Cruise Control 191 Changing the Set Speed Note If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal the set speed will not change When you release the accelerator pedal you will return to the speed that you previously set e Press SET up or down and hold to increase or decrease the set speed Release the control when you reach the desired speed e Press SET up or down and release The set speed will change in approximately 1 mph 2 km h increments e Press the accelerator pedal or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed Press SET up and release Canceling the Set Speed Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal The set speed will not be erased Resuming the Set Speed Press and release RES Switching Cruise Control Off Note The set speed is erased when you switch off cruise control Press the OFF control down and release or turn off the ignition USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED WARNING Always pay close attention to changing road conditions especially when using adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control cannot replace attentive driving Failing to follow any of the warnings below or failing to pay attention to the road may result in a collision serious injury or death WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision warning or avoidance system Additionally adaptive cruise control will not detect e stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph 10 km h e pedestrians or objects in the road
11. MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Copt Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 346 Scheduled Maintenance Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Hours MiLEAGE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEacE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance 347 EXCEPTIONS There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule They are listed below Normal vehicle axle maintenance Rear axles and power take off units with synthetic fluid and light duty trucks equipped with Ford design axles are lubricated for life do not check or change fluid unless a leak is suspect
12. P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE MyLincoln Touch 349 INTRODUCTION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving Note Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition off and no doors open This system uses a four corner strategy to provide quick access several vehicle features and settings The touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular phone multimedia climate control and navigation system The corners display any active modes within those menus such as phone status or the climate temperatur
13. The station is not available in your current location Fill out the station issue form at website listed below Fill out the station issue form at website listed below No action required This is normal behavior http www ibiquity com automotive report radio station experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp U S and foreign patents HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp Ford Motor Company and iBiquity Digital Corp are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology Content may be changed added or deleted at any time at the station owner s discretion 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 369 Radio Voice Commands If you are listening to the radio press the voice button on i the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to the radio press the voice button and after the tone say Radio then any of the commands in the following chart RADIO 87 0 107 9 87 9 107 9 HD 530 1710 FM 1 preset lt gt Tf available If you have said Browse see Browsing device content earlier in this section If you have said Tune see the following Tune chart lt 87 9 107 9 gt HD lt gt AM lt 530 1710 gt FM 1
14. e It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the coolant concentration above 5096 e A coolant concentration of 6096 will provide improved freeze point protection Engine coolant concentrations above 6096 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage If you drive in extremely hot climates e t may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the coolant concentration to 4096 e A coolant concentration of 4096 will provide improved overheat protection Engine coolant concentrations below 4096 will decrease the corrosion freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection What You Should Know About Fail Safe Cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 264 Maintenance How Fail Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat the engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area and E The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate a The service engine soon indicator will illuminate If th
15. 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Select position P or N 3 Press the start button The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note If the engine does not start on the first try wait for a short period of time and try again If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below 13 F 25 C press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Starting and Stopping the Engine 155 If the engine does not start after three attempts wait 10 seconds and follow this flooded engine procedure 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there 3 Select position P or N 4 Start the engine Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have this checked immediately Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of time we recommend that you do one of the following e Open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 centimeters e Set your climate control to outside air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury WARNING Do
16. D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 or online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 248 Fuses CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Tf electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check 15 the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Maxi ipo Fuse link maxi A rating fuses fuses fuses fee cartridge WE C g M e eee E Vide Volt Pink Pink Tn Tn MIE A C gt e NGC AA ae 2 3 4 5 A A A A T Red Red 15A 25A Natural Natural Natural Natural 40A Orange Green Green 50 Red Red Red 60 Blue
17. Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information see http www microsoft com exporting TRADEMARKS This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation third party software or service providers their affiliates or suppliers PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates or subsidiaries For product support please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICE Should you have any questions concerning this EULA or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 435 No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW FORD MOTOR COMPANY ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIAB
18. Front wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels placed on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment This prevents damage to the transmission Towing an all wheel drive vehicle requires that all wheels be off the ground such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment This prevents damage to the transmission all wheel drive system and vehicle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 228 Towing TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Emergency Towing If your vehicle becomes inoperable without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle it can be flat towed all wheels on the ground regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration under the following conditions e Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction e Place the transmission in position N See Automatic transmission in the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into N e Maximum speed is 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 kilometers Recreational Towing Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle See the Climate Control chapter Follow these guidelines if you need to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motorhome We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your vehicle and its transmission after it is hoo
19. ISUBIO amp J 191030 A p nb se M TSE 0 seouno ZT CIST D squid yz gpI TD sjrenb J TT Tr 01 send O TI pue NIW Usemjog pmg I9USEM PIOTUSPUIM IMV PME ALD YU I JSULIL IaMog pmg GAY ernuo1ogrp 1eoj gema UOISSTUISUBI INBUONY ping Sut1999s IaMog Juepooo oulsuy Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing 2013 MKX mkx USA fus 323 Capacities and Specifications Surg Jo SUNIY TIAS PMI 107 Ie eop pezuoune MO 99g E AI9 UI 92IAJ9S 1294102 IY IUTUISIDP 03 UOLOULOJURL BOWNUAIULDUL PINPIYIS 0 19J9Y eSeurep UOISSTUISUBI osneo few PMI pepuswUIOdIeI y uey 194740 pmg Aue Jo asp osuel Surje1odo ewou sonsdip ayy uo uorjeorpur ay Aq 39s 9q pmoys feas pmp pue pmp uorssrusueJ JO qunoure aug 191009 uej ur ue YIM paddmba jt pue ezrs 191009 uo paseq Area Lew suoreordde euiog Ajroedeo qg amp ip oyewrxoidde Apuo sojeorpur T TI SHEND E TI eseyoed MO IOLI YIM JUR O09 9UIBULT ATeA Agu suorjeordde ourog Ayoedeo y Arp oyeturxoidde ATuo soyeorpuy aporyaa MoA ut peddmbo Arreurstio d quepooo ay PPV S 9A9 uoIsstula poseoJour pue Aurouooo ang Poonpel eoueuro Jod eurguo poonpoi sporroed Suppuero ourguo Io8uo ut J Nset ULI porroods ouo ayy uey 19470 sro SUSAN guisua MoA Jo Ayrrqeanp y Sururejureur o uA jgeueq Aurouooo ong e SoAIS YOM TIO eutsue p1o p YIM pesn oq 07 peusrsop Useq sey eurguo NOX prep uoreognen qv 9U Aejdsrp pue Qc AGS AVS
20. Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Introduction 9 ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual The more that you know about it the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it WARNING Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle Note This manual describes a range of product features and options sometimes before they are generally available Therefore you may find options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle Note Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models so they may appear different than your vehicle However the essential information in the illustrations is always correct Note Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations Note Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle This manual may qualify the location of a component as left hand side or right hand side The side is determined when facing forward in the seat A A Right hand side B Left hand side e Protecting the Environment You must play your part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guid
21. Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen gt Settings gt BT Devices Add Device 2 Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s user guide if necessary 3 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC on the screen The display indicates when the pairing is successful The system asks you if you want to download your phonebook SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s user guide and visit the website 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 386 MyLincoln Touch Making Calls EE Press the voice button When prompted say Call lt name gt or us say Dial then the desired number ne To end the call or exit phone mode press and hold the phone t button Receiving Calls During an incoming call an audible tone sounds Call information appears in the display if it is available pou Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by 1 pressing the phone button on your steering wheel controls Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by pressing and holding the phone button on your steering wheel controls Ignore the call by doing nothing SYNC logs it as a missed call Phone Menu Options Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the following options When you select Ac
22. The seat back will click when it is locked into position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Seats 141 REAR SEAT ARMREST Press the latch and pull the armrest forward for armrest or cupholder use Lift up one of the slotted areas on the cover to access the cup holders To close the armrest close the cupholder cover and rotate the armrest rearward until the latch clicks 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 142 Seats Rear Heated Seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door panels
23. USA fus Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel The signal is blocked When you move into an open area the ignal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to resolve subscription issues Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip function on that station No action required 376 MyLincoln Touch Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select D the CD tab When you select Repeat Choose to repeat the currently playing track all tracks on the disc or turn the feature off if already on order or turn the feature off if already on Hear a brief sampling of all available tracks More Info Options Sound Adjust Bass Treble Midrange Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume settings Your vehicle may not have all these settings Compression Turn the compression feature on and off Look through all available audio sources You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder if applicable 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 377 CD Voice Commands EM If you are listening to a CD press the voice button on the i steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to a CD pr
24. You agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and services suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and systems suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may disclose this information to others but not in a form that personally identifies you Internet Based Services Components The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet based services You acknowledge and agree that MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers their affiliates and or their designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICE e Additional Software Services The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service suppliers MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and
25. activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNCO supplement for more information CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Some constituents of engine exhaust certain vehicle components certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Note Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules safety belt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for more information 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 14 Introduction LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE FINANCIAL SERVICES U S ONLY Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Lincoln Automotive Financial Services thank you for your business For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us as well as help manage your account Phone 1 888 498 8801 For more information regarding Lincoln Automotive Financial Servi
26. best guess at your request with these turned off Phone Candidate Candidate lists are possible results from your Lists voice commands The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system s voice volume level 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 408 MyLincoln Touch Media Player Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Media Player then select from the following Media Player Autoplay When this feature is on the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process When this feature is off the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source Bluetooth Devices Select to connect disconnect add or delete a device You can also set a device as your favorite so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle Database Info the Gracenote Database Gracenote amp Mgmt With this feature on the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files This overrides information from your device This feature defaults to off Cover Art Priority With this feature on the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files This overrides any art from your device This feature defaults to Media Player 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printin
27. e the transmission selector lever is in position N or P e the ignition is turned off The seat and steering wheel will move to the original position when e the transmission selector lever is in position N or P e the ignition is put in accessory mode or is started The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the information display See the Information Displays chapter HEATED AND COOLED SEATS Heated Seats WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 138 Seats Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly The heated seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the
28. mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 236 Roadside Emergencies FUEL CUT OFF SWITCH WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Turn the ignition on 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re enable fuel pump Note If your vehicle has the push button start system press the stop start button twice to reactivate the fuel system JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relea
29. of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Load Carrying 217 e Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH WITH XXXX XXXXXXX E TIRES TIRES XXXX XX RIMS RIMS AT XXX KPAX PSLCOLD AT XxX MPaxx PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXTPNT XX RC XI DSO we TINTTR TIPPS TR iis FIR SPR XXXXX XXX XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX DATE xx xx MFD a FORD MC MOTOR CC Q MN ner PURI iv gt REAR op M ENLA DXX J gt yooxK6 ib AVEC TIRES PNEUS QR MN WOX DOOQXX XXXX XXXXX XXXXXX RIMS TANTES XXxXXX AT A kPa PSI LPC ox xx COLD A FROID AME VIN 3000000000000000 TYPE XXX XXXX COMPLIES 000 300 200 ROK Ann lil gi TIPPS TR TANE TTR Ini XX X XXXX XXX pa XXX 00 000000 XX WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could resu
30. rear window ssssees 129 Dipstick automatic transmission fl id iiiter ebore res 266 engine oll s cessere ii eee 260 Display settings 404 Driving under special conditions 170 174 176 Sa to ost 175 snow and ice inocuos 177 through water 175 231 Dual automatic temperature control DATO ou irrena 127 E Electronic message center 108 Electronic stability control 183 Emergencies roadside jump starting oer 236 running out of fuel 159 Index 452 Emergency brake see Parking brake 180 Emission control system 163 End user license agreement 430 Engine eraino nin edas 320 CA erein 283 COOLA coa irn erede 261 fail safe cooling 263 idle speed control 268 lubrication specifications 321 refill capacities 321 service points suss 260 Engine block heater 155 Engine oil checking and adding 260 dps aia 260 filter specifications 324 refill capacities s 321 specifications 321 Event data recording 12 Exhaust fumes 155 F Fail safe cooling 263 Fleet MyKey programming 63 Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV 157 FLOOR MAUS inco eire 232 F
31. system which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change service interval this interval may be up to one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display it is time for an oil change the oil change must be done within two weeks or 500 miles 800 kilometers of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor amp must be reset after each oil change see the Information Displays chapter If your information display is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles 8000 kilometers from your last oil change Never exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between oil change intervals Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules
32. the front safety belt pretensioners driver airbag passenger airbag seat mounted side airbags and the Safety Canopy Based on the type of accident frontal impact side impact or rollover the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working See the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either flash or stay lit N e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem or light are repaired 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 55 If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a crash The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal or lateral deceleration sufficient
33. therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Potential Map Inaccuracy Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads traffic controls or driving conditions Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes Emergency Services Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations Not all emergency services such as police fire stations hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 438 Appendices TeleNav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software Your use of the TeleNav Software imdicates that you accept these terms and conditions If you do mot accept these terms and conditions do not break the seal of the package launch or otherwise use the TeleNav Software TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time with or without notice to you You agree to visit http www telenav com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy 1 Safe and Lawful Use You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and oth
34. 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 425 Change the appearance of the map display by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in the upper left corner of the screen It toggles between three different map modes Heading up North up and 3D Cherry Hill Rd Heading up 2D map always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen This view is available for map scales up to 2 5 miles 4 kilometers The system remembers this setting for larger map scales but shows the map in North up only If the scale returns below this level the system restores Heading up N North up 2D map always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map This viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180 degrees by dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map Re center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll qe the map away from your vehicle s current location Auto Zoom Press the green bar to access map mode then select the or zoom button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen When you press Auto Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale The map zoom level then synchronizes with vehicle speed The slower your vehicle is traveling the farther in the map zooms the faster your vehicle is traveling the farther the
35. 3rd Printing USA fus attaching safety restraints for eluldretr ite oem 24 Relays ares 248 249 Remote entry system illuminated entry 72 73 locking unlocking doors 69 opening the trunk 70 replacing the batteries 58 Reverse sensing system 185 Roadside assistance 234 Roll stability control 183 Roof rack ss 212 Route preferences 423 S Safety Belt Maintenance 41 Safety belts see Safety restraints 34 38 Safety defects reporting 247 Safety information 352 Safety restraints 34 36 38 Belt Minder 38 Index 455 Belt MinderG Setting a destination by deactivating activating 40 VOICE QN 418 extension assembly 37 for adulte d 34 36 SOLES ae 403 for children 19 24 Setting the clock 125 403 Occupant Classification Side air curtain 52 Sensor coccooocnncnononononannoncconnnnnoninns 47 E safety belt maintenance 4 Side curtain airbags system 52 seat belt maintenance A SIRIUS amp tellit di 370 warning light and chime 38 pane gear AE SIRIUS satellite radio voice Safety restraints command 372 LATCH anchors ss P
36. 6 Reverse the procedure to install the new bulb 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 277 Replacing HID headlamp bulbs if equipped The low beam headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage When the bulb is burned out the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Open the hood e 3 At the wheel well remove the fasteners from the splash shield then pull the splash shield back Bb e to gain access to the bulbs 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly 5 Carefully pull the bulb out of the socket and push in the new bulb 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise Replacing side marker bulbs Your vehicle is equipped with LED side marker bulbs It is designed to last the life of the vehicle If replacement is required see your authorized dealer 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 278 Maintenance Replacing fog lamp bulbs 1 Make sure that the fog lamp switch is in the off position 2 From underneath the vehicle 4 R remove the splash shield and rotate the harness bulb assembly Y counterclockwise to remove from Ar the fog lamp 3 Carefully disconnect the
37. Assist on or off that setting applies for all paired phones If 911 Assist is turned off either a voice message plays or a display message or icon comes on or both when your vehicle is started after a previously paired phone connects Note Every phone operates differently While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones some may have trouble using this feature If a crash deploys an airbag excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts if equipped or activates the fuel pump shut off your SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca e For information on airbag deployment see the Supplementary Restraints System chapter e For information on the fuel pump shut off see the Roadside Emergencies chapter Setting 911 Assist On Press the Information button gt Apps gt 911 Assist then select On 2 You can also access 911 Assist by e Pressing the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone gt 911 Assist or e Pressing the Settings icon gt Help gt 911 Assist To Make Sure that 911 Assist Works Properly e SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use e The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident e You must pair and connect
38. Axle and child safety seats lubricant specifications 321 description pensaire na disposal decebat B driver airbag 0 0 eee passenger airbag oc Battery wants EOS 268 side airbag cece 45 51 acid treating emergencies 268 f i jumping a disabled battery 236 Air cleaner filter 272 273 324 maintenance free 268 Air filter cabin cnica 130 replacement specifications 324 All Wheel Drive AWD SOFVIGITIB isses doxiseni desee eio 268 driving off road 172 Blind Spot Information Ambient mood lighting 405 SYSTEM Lassen rere t 200 AM FM 363 Booster seats esses 22 Antifreeze Brake uu NES 179 anti loek cene eh 180 see Engine coolant 261 anti lock brake system ABS Anti lock brake system warning light o 180 See Brakes euet 180 brake warning light 180 Anti theft system 79 81 fluid checking and adding 267 arming the system 79 81 fluid refill capacities 321 disarming a triggered system 81 fluid specifications 321 lubricant specifications 321 JATIDEOSLUS ases nerit apa 141 parking ses 180 Audio system shift interlock 169 Single UD otro 125 tral ido 224 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Index 451 C Specifications 321 Capacitise tor retine
39. Charging System Messages Check Charging Displayed when the charging system needs System servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Turn Power Off to Displayed when the battery management Save Battery system determines that e the battery is at a low state of charge or e the ignition has been in accessory position or on position with the engine off for approximately 45 minutes Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery This message will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state of charge recovery 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Information Displays 117 Battery and Action Description Charging System Messages LE Contact Dealer possible Factory Mode Contact Contact your authorized dealer as soon as Dealer possible BLISO Messages Blind Spot Not Displayed when the blind spot information Available Sensor system cross traffic alert system sensors are Blocked blocked Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve Blind Spot System Displayed when a fault with the blind spot Fault information system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Cross Traffic Not Displayed when the blind spot information Available Sensor system cross traffic alert system sen
40. Cruise Control Press the brake pedal or press CNCL to disengage the system The last set speed will display with a strikethrough Disengaging the system will not erase your previous set speed 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Cruise Control 195 Overriding Adaptive Cruise Control WARNING Whenever the driver is overriding the ACC by pressing the accelerator pedal the ACC will not automatically apply the brakes to maintain separation from any vehicle ahead You can override the set speed and gap distance by pressing the accelerator pedal When you are overriding the system the green indicator light illuminates and the follow vehicle shows in the information display The system will resume operation when you release the accelerator pedal The vehicle speed will decrease to the set speed or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle Changing the Set Speed There are three ways to change the set speed e Accelerate or brake to the desired speed and press SET upward and release e Increase or decrease the speed by holding SET upward or downward until the desired set speed is shown on the information display The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed e Increase or decrease the speed in increments of 1 mph 2 km h by briefly pressing SET upward or downward The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new set speed The set speed will display continuously
41. Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Hours MiLEAGE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance 341 Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Copt Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE 342 Scheduled Maintenance Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns Miteace Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Hours MiLEAGE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3
42. EQUIPPED Note This feature does not prevent trailer sway but reduces it once it begins Note This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying Note In some cases if vehicle speed is too high the system may turn on multiple times gradually reducing vehicle speed This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and if necessary reduces engine power If the trailer begins to sway the stability control light flashes and the message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED appears in the information display The first thing to do is slow your vehicle down then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution See the Load Carrying chapter for specific loading information RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart below Note Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area Do not exceed 30 feet 2 79 meters trailer frontal area Note For high altitude operation reduce the gross combined weight by 296 per 1000 feet 300 meters starting at the 1000 foot 300 meter elevation point Note Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight as your vehicle s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed
43. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Introduction 13 Note Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNCO or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location such as latitude and longitude and or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the 911 Assist feature See your SYNCO chapter for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches that you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not
44. Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 2 Table of Contents MyKey 63 Settings MyKey 4n ssec d ede p or tc bed Bide lee d 63 Creating TU 64 AAA O durata foie sui cordi d 65 System Status vod eed aes vim bo dedu p OH Io ia or et x 65 Remote start MyKey llle 65 Troubleshooting MyKey llle 67 Locks 69 Locking and unlocking io errea dr ai ke p nee a Ka E a e E E 69 SecuriCode keyless entry keypad nananana aaeeea TT Security 79 SecuriLock passive anti theft system aaan aaa aaa 79 ATC alarm siis oes hoa RR EROR d EXEC RE ERN 81 Steering Wheel 82 Adjusting the steering wheel llle 82 Steering wheel controls 00000020 eee eee eee 84 Wipers and Washers 87 Windshield wipers ce ee ee 87 Rain sensing wipers 0 ooo 87 Windshield washers ara casceX ex a ARRe ernvy RS 88 Rear window wiper and washer 0 0000 eee eee o 88 Lighting 89 Lighting COMO 89 AULOIMDS zu arn cud arx e RAdee PRN asar area 89 Instrument lighting dimer 0 0 000000 cece eee 90 Headlamp exit delay 0 0 ee eee 90 Daytime running lampS 2 06 ws os eke e eae 9 ERR a aa OR Ow xU 91 Front fog lamps ergere 404 044 4 Rx et Be AES RTI 92 Adaptive headlampsS ee eee 92 Direction indicatOtS 2 4 5 4 46 4085 mae RES RR ERE ERROR GRRE 93 Interior lamps ers 93 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Table of Contents 3
45. Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth Michigan 48170 Attention Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Manual A French owner s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance 247 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington
46. LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two lower anchors located where your vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the symbols as shown Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps See Using Tether Straps in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child Safety 29 Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Position
47. Mirrors 4 WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in motion Y B Off C v B A Left mirror A C Right mirror 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Windows and Mirrors 97 To adjust your mirrors 1 Select the mirror you want to adjust 2 Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror 3 Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place Fold Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position Memory Mirrors You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function See Memory function in the Seats chapter Auto Dimming Feature The driver s side exterior mirror will automatically dim when the interior auto dimming mirror is activated Signal Indicator Mirrors If Equipped The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you activate the turn signal Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors If Equipped WARNING Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they appear Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors They are designed to assist you by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle Check the main mirror first before a lane change then check the blind spot mirror If no vehicles are present in the bl
48. O C9 C9 ak U8B888BBB The fuses are coded as follows Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components M TEN 30A Driver front smart window front smart window A ee ee 3 304 Passenger front smart window 4 oA Demand lamps relay 20A Subwoofer 5A Radio frequency module ___ MEER E switch Driver seat module 8 l0A PNotused spre ps ioa Power liftgate 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuses 255 Fuse or relay number 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 3 2 24 Protected components rating Instrument panel cluster Heads up display Interior lighting Puddle lamps Backlighting signals signals stop lamps 0 0 10A Keypad illumination Brake shift interlock Start button LED Passive anti theft system Powertrain control module wake up Second row power enable Lock unlock relays vehicles without intelligent access IA access IA Headlamp switch 15A Power tilt telescope steering column On board diagnostics Liftgate release Global positioning system module Intelligent access IA 28 15A Ignition switch without IA Key inhibit solenoid Push button start with IA 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 256 Fuses number rating SYNCO module Not used spare 32 15A Moonroof Power windows front Compass auto dimming rear view mirror Not used spare 34 10A Reve
49. Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Parking Aids 185 The system can be turned off using the information display control Refer to the Information Display chapter If a fault is present in the system a warning message appears in the information display and does not allow the driver to switch the faulted system on Note If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey it is possible to prevent turning the sensing system off Refer to the MyKey chapter Using the Rear Sensing System The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the rate of the audible warning increases When the obstacle is fewer than 12 inches 30 centimeters away the warning sounds continuously If a stationary or receding object is detected farther than 12 inches 30 centimeters from the side of the vehicle the tone sounds for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the warning sounds again A Coverage area of up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper A EM gt e mu The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R e and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e but not moving and a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of 3 mph 5 km h or less e and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h a
50. Printing USA fus 282 Vehicle Care e mmediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft amp Bug and Tar Remover e Note Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash Off as soon as possible e Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car wash Exterior Chrome Note Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding that which is recommended e Note Using other non recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage Underbody Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts Use only approved
51. Refer to the Seats chapter Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall will cancel the operation The column will respond to the adjustment control 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 84 Steering Wheel AUDIO CONTROL SEEK Press to select the next or previous stored preset or track Press and hold to select the next or previous frequency or seek through a track MEDIA Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes MUTE Press to silence the radio VOL Volume Press to increase or decrease the volume VOICE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED A Phone mode B Voice recognition A v A v B See the MyLincoln Touch chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Steering Wheel 85 CRUISE CONTROL Typ ll E v Typ le i v See the Cruise Control chapter for information on this feature el e 2 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 86 Steering Wheel INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL Refer to the Information Displays chapter for more information Cluster Display Control Features Use this control to adjust the right side of the cluster display Navigate through the screen and press OK to select Refer to the MyLincoln Touch chapter HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED See the MyLincoln Touch chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wipers and Washers 87 WIND
52. Safety 17 GENERAL INFORMATION See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in your vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or locate NHTSA on the internet In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation or locate your local St John Ambulance office by searching for St John Ambulance on the internet or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age an
53. The brake pedal must be pressed just like any typical braking situation Due to the nature of radar technology there may be certain instances where vehicles do not provide a collision warning These include e Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving below 6 mph 10 km h e Pedestrians or objects in the roadway e Oncoming vehicles in the same lane e Severe weather conditions see blocked sensor section Debris build up on the grille near the headlamps see blocked sensor section e Small distance to vehicle ahead Steering wheel and pedal movements are large very active driving style e High interior temperatures which may deactivate the illumination or the warning lamps until the interior temperature reduces audible warning still sounds Certain conditions may reduce the visibility of the warning lamp therefore it is recommended to keep the audible warning on If the front end of the vehicle is hit or damaged the radar sensing zone may be altered causing missed or false collision warnings See your authorized dealer to have your collision warning radar checked for proper coverage and operation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Driving Aids 209 STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than three to five seconds while the engine is running Do not operate the vehicle with a low
54. To turn a feature on and off just touch the graphic with your finger To get the best performance from the touch sensitive controls keep in mind e Do not press hard on the controls They are sensitive to light touch e Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch control graphic Touching off center of the graphic may affect operation of a nearby control e Make sure your hands are clean and dry e Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger you may have trouble using it if you are wearing gloves e Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference for example inadvertently turning on a feature other than the one you meant to turn on Depending on your vehicle and option package you may also have these controls on your bezel e Power Switch the media or climate features off and on e VOL and fan slider bars Slide your finger over the rear slider area to control the volume of playing media or the climate system fan e Seek and Tune buttons Use as you normally would in media modes e Eject Eject a CD from the entertainment system e SOURCE Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes The screen does not change but you see the media change in the lower left status bar e SOUND Touch the word to access the Sound menu where you can adjust settings such as Bass Treble Midrange Balance and Fade THX Deep note De
55. USA fus 78 Locks Erasing a Personal Code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Press and release the 1 2 on the keypad within five seconds 3 Press and hold the 1e2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti Scan Feature The keypad will go into an anti scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times 35 consecutive button presses This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the unlock button on the remote control e the ignition is turned on e unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access Unlocking and Locking the Doors To unlock the driver door Enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code You must press each number within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note All doors will unlock if the two stage unlocking feature is disabled Refer to Locking and Unlocking earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors Enter the factory set code or your personal code then press the 3e4 control within five seconds To lock all doors Press and hold 7 8 and 990 at the same time with the driver door closed You do not need to enter the keypad code first 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Security 79 SECURILOCKO P
56. V GP6OZIN SSM uomneogroeds pJo p Jo sjueurombod ay Joour A uo poeu ro SUISU amp ojepueuir JOU st IO 1030ur pue q onauqqu s 10 IHOYJU S jo esp 9AUp suo eg i SALIP UONPINIDIAS PIO HA a 9UIeN WAV PIOA ME w Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing 2013 MKX mkx USA fus 324 Capacities and Specifications Motorcraft part numbers WW 2601 PF driver side Windshield wiper blade WW 2001 PF passenger side WW 1401 PF rear Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Note Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft amp or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel 20000000000000000t Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Capacities and Specifications 325 The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information G Assembly plant H Production sequence number X XXXXXX A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location C Make vehicle line series b
57. Voice Commands 1 Press the voice button 2 When prompted say Services This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone 3 Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose 4 Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen If your vehicle is equipped with the Navigation press the Information button If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation press the green tab on your touchscreen 1 Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone 2 Once you connect to the service follow the voice prompts to request the desired service such as Traffic or Directions You can also say What are my choices to receive a list of available services from which to choose 9 Say Services to return to the Services main menu or for help say Help 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 394 MyLincoln Touch Receiving Turn by Turn Directions 1 When connected to SYNC Services say Directions or Business Search To find the closest business or type of business to you
58. WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied WARNING Install the head restraint properly to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash Note Before adjusting any head restraint adjust the seat back to an upright driving or riding position Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position To adjust the head restraint do the following Front Seat and Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints Note The center rear head restraint is fixed and non adjustable The head restraint consist of a trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatback 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 134 Seats The head restraints consist of A An energy absorbing head restraint B Two steel stems C Guide sleeve unlock and remove button D Guide sleeve adjust and release button e Raise Pull up on the head restraint A e Lower Press and hold the guide sleeve adjust and release button D and push down on the head restraint A e Remove Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position and then press and hold both the adjust and release button D and the unlock a
59. Yellow Yelow 70A Tn Brom soa Natural Black Black Ria em gt S 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuses 249 FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment It has high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected see Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter The high current fuses are coded as follows number rating o 2 Not sed ___ 3 Not used 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 250 Fuses number rating pump 6 po Neused INotused Not used Rear window defroster heated mirror relay Boop j Steterrelay bp Fuel
60. ___ 82 Rear washer 83 Not used 84 TT park lamps 85 Not used PCM keep alive PCM relay Run start relay 88 D l Run start relay sas sar Adaptive lighting gw oa PCM O 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuses 253 Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components number rating ABS module Blower motor rear defroster relay panel run start 96 O po 0 Neused Neused po Neued 98 CAC clutch relay O Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located behind a trim panel on the left side of the driver s footwell near the parking brake To remove the trim panel slide the release lever to the right then pull the trim panel out To remove the fuse panel cover press in the tabs on both sides of the cover then pull the cover off To reinstall the fuse panel cover place the top part of the cover on the fuse panel then push the bottom part of the cover until it clicks into place Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is secure To reinstall the trim panel align the tabs on the bottom of the panel with the grooves push the panel shut and slide the release lever to the left to secure the panel To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 254 Fuses N le e Joo e m 18 4 l Cz E EN C Cx an
61. a GPS signal to update the clock Once your vehicle acquires the signal it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time 1 Press the Settings icon gt Clock 2 Press and to adjust the time From this screen you can also make other adjustments such as 12 or 24 hour mode activate GPS time synchronization and have the system automatically update for daylight savings time and new time zones You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off It appears at the top center of the touchscreen next to the time and date The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 404 MyLincoln Touch Display You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when prompted say Display settings Press the Settings icon gt Display then select from the following Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or dimmer Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based on the outside light level e If you select AUTO or NIGHT you have the options of turning the display s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature Edit Wallpaper e You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload your own Uploading Photos for Your Ho
62. acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on To turn the feature on and use it 1 Press AM or FM gt Options gt TAG button gt On 2 When you hear a song you like touch TAG 3 The system automatically saves the song s information and transfers it to your portable music player if supported when you connect it to the system The system automatically transfers the tag to your player if already connected and a pop up confirms the transfer 4 When you access iTunes with your portable music player the tags appear to you as a reminder The system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs For a list of devices that support tagging see www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 366 MyLincoln Touch When HD Radio broadcasts are active you can access the following functions Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on although it does not scan for HD2 HD7 channels You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast To save a multicast When the channel is active on screen press station as a preset and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished When recalling a HD2 or HD3 memory preset there is a mute before the digital audio plays as the system must once agai
63. airbags located inside the seat back of the driver and front passenger seats e crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter e ry e front passenger sensing system Note The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat mounted side airbag if it detects an empty unbuckled passenger seat The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags SAFETY CANOPY CURTAIN AIRBAGS WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the curtain airbags its fuses the A B C or D pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Supplement
64. any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Power Liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING Keep keys out of the reach of children Do not allow children to operate the power liftgate or to play near to an open or moving power liftgate Note Cycling the ignition while the liftgate is power closing and is near the latch may cause the liftgate to reverse to full open position Make sure that the liftgate is closed before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure The liftgate or its components could be damaged Note Do not drive with the liftgate open without first disabling the power function and securing the liftgate to the vehicle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 74 Locks Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested You can enable or disable the power liftgate using the information display The remote control and instrument panel button will still operate the liftgate regardless of the setting Opening and Closing the Power Liftgate Note The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second press of the instrument panel or the control button on the liftgat
65. as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software or e use the TeleNav Software in any manner that i infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party ii violates any law statute ordinance or regulation including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming privacy consumer and child protection obscenity or defamation or iii is harmful threatening abusive harassing tortuous defamatory vulgar obscene libelous or otherwise objectionable and f lease rent out or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 440 Appendices 4 Disclaimers To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law in no event will TeleNav its licensors and suppliers or agents or employees of any of the foregoing be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software Such data may not always reflect reality due to among other things road closures construction weather new roads and other changing conditions You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software For example but without limita
66. as brake lining wear Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and serious injury Note Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register There is no fee or subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report but you must register to use this feature Note This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Before running a report review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice Note In order to allow a break in period for your vehicle you may not be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles Note Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at www SYNCMyRide com After registering you can request a Vehicle Health Report inside your vehicle Return to your account at www SYNCMyRide com to view your report You can also choose for SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting The system allows you to check your vehicle s overall health in the form of a diagnostic report card The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable information such as e Vehicle Diagnostic Information e Scheduled maintenance e Open Recalls and Field Service Actions e
67. as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE provided you retain no copies you transfer all of the SOFTWARE including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades and if applicable the Certificate s of Authenticity and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Termination Without prejudice to any other rights FORD MOTOR COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 432 Appendices e Security Updates Digital Rights Management Content owners use the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their intellectual property included copyrighted content Portions of the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content This action does not affect unprotected content When your DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses Content owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE to access their content If you decline an upgrade you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade Consent to Use of Data
68. b to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information and to keep it true accurate current and complete 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 439 3 Software License Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal non exclusive non transferable license except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license without the right to sublicense to use the TeleNav Software in object code form only in order to access and use the TeleNav Software This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties 3 1 License limitations You agree not to do any of the following a reverse engineer decompile disassemble translate modify alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof b attempt to derive the source code audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav c remove from the TeleNav Software or alter any of TeleNav s or its suppliers trademarks trade names logos patent or copyright notices or other notices or markings d distribute sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others except
69. blockage is removed the system can be reset in two ways 1 when at least two objects are detected while driving or 2 turn the ignition key from on to off then back on If the blockage is still present after the key cycle the system senses again that it is blocked after driving in traffic 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 204 Driving Aids Reasons for messages being displayed dirty or obstructed remove the obstruction The radar surface is Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to not dirty or obstructed allow the radar to detect passing vehicles so it can clear the blocked state Heavy rainfall snowfall No action required The system automatically interferes with the resets to an unblocked state once the radar signals rainfall snowfall rate decreases or stops Do not use BLISO and or CTA in these conditions System Limitations The BLISO and CTA systems do have their limitations situations such as severe weather conditions or debris build up on the sensor area may limit vehicle detection The following are other situations that may limit the BLISO e Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone e Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates e When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone The following are other situations that may limit the CTA system e Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors e Approa
70. bulb from the harness assembly via the two snap clips 4 Reverse the procedure to install the new bulb Replacing backup lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position then open the liftgate to expose the lamp assembly bolts 2 Remove the two bolts from the lamp assembly 3 Carefully remove the lamp assembly away from the vehicle by pulling the assembly straight out to expose the bulb socket 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 5 Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb 6 Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise 7 Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the lamp assembly with two bolts 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 279 Replacing tail stop turn side marker lamp bulbs Your vehicle is equipped with a tail stop turn sidemarker lamp assembly containing integral multiple light emitting diodes LED See your authorized dealer for the replacement LED module Replacing supplemental liftgate lamp assembly Your vehicle is equipped with a liftgate lamp assembly containing integral multiple light emitting diodes LED If one or more LEDs burn out the complete lamp module has to be replaced See your authorized dealer for the replacement LED module Replacing high mount brake lamp bulbs Your vehicle is equipped with an LED center high mount st
71. by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while your vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a crash 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 20 Child Safety WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash WARNING Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle Use any attachment method as indi
72. cable on the negative terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 240 Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training equipment or both so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the onli
73. child from injury in a crash WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly A WARNING Always drive and ride with your seat back upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained A WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3
74. cleaned with Motorcraft amp Premium Cooling System Flush and refilled with prediluted engine coolant as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating Or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant Unscrew the cap slowly Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification See Capacities and Specifications for more information Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the proper level 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 263 Recycled Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Severe Climates If you drive in extremely cold climates
75. crash be replaced However if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts see Cleaning the Interior in the Vehicle Care chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 42 Personal Safety System PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp e Front crash severity sensors e hestraints control module with impact and safing sensors e hestraint system warning light and backup tone e The electrical wi
76. downloaded non navigation systems us press the voice button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the following commands SIRIUS Travel Link If Equipped and If Activated WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot Note A paid subscription is required to access and use these features Go to www siriusxm com travellink for more information Note Visit www siriusxm com traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SIRIUS Travel Link Note Neither SIRIUS nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SIRIUS Travel Link services or its use in vehicles When you subscribe to SIRIUS Travel Link it can help you locate the best gas prices find movie listings get current traffic alerts view the current weather map get accura
77. driver door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button start systems as well as a remote control If your intelligent access key is lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences See your authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key Note A maximum of four intelligent access keys can be programmed to your vehicle You must take your vehicle and all access keys to your 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 80 Security authorized dealer to be erased and reprogrammed if you would like to replace a previously programmed access key with a new access key or if you already have four access keys programmed to your vehicle You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside the vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily accessible See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed keys are not available Make sure that the vehicle is off before beginning this procedure Make sure that all doors are closed before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure Perform all steps
78. e Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes e Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving your vehicle Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use e Keep plug terminals free and clean of dirt and corrosion e Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary The heater uses 0 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use The system does not have a thermostat It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuel and Refueling 157 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pum
79. e Elapsed trip time timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted Fuel Economy Use the left right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display a Inst Fuel XX Min Fuel A Economy History Instantaneous fuel usage Fuel usage over a 5 10 or x 30 minute time span Total odometer lower left corner Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed fuel usage information TTo configure the fuel usage time span press the right arrow button when in this screen e Inst Fuel Economy This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy e XX Min Fuel History This display shows a bar chart of your fuel history Settings ra In this mode you can configure different driver setting choices Note Some items are optional and may not appear On default setting Off Blind Spot On default on key cycle Off Collision Warning High Normal Low On default on key cycle Off On default on key cycle Off 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 112 Information Displays Vehicle Locks Remote All doors Driver s door Unlocking Mica Standard Memory On See Menu control later in this section Oil Life Reset Set to XXX Enable Disable Climate Control Heater A C Auto Last using this Settings feature allows Steering Wheel Auto Heated you to select Off different climate control modes Front D
80. e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel e Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuel and Refueling 161 Easy Fuel amp No Cap Fuel System WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system and leave the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping Pump fuel as normal 4 After you are done pumping fuel wait about five seconds before slowly removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
81. effect to its conflict of laws provisions To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration both TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara California The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply 7 Assignment You may not resell assign or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations except in totality in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement Any such sale assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement without liability to TeleNav in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software Notwithstanding the foregoing TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 442 Appendices 8 Miscellaneous 8 1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof 8 2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement TeleNav retains all right title and interest in and to the
82. enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the Engine Off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key if equipped 3 Block the wheels 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 258 Maintenance Working with the Engine On WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 1 Set the parking brake and shift to position P 2 Block the wheels OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column E 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood latch om located under the front passenger side of the hood 3 Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 259 UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW A Engine coolant reservoir B Power steering fluid reservoir C Brake fluid reservoir D Battery E Power distribution box F Air filter assembly G Transmission fluid dipstick H Engine oil dipstick I Engine oil filler cap J Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2013 MKX mkx
83. fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 105 Low tire pressure warning Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains 5 on at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Low washer fluid RTT AEN llluninates when the windshield washer fluid is low Parking Lamps if equipped RTT It will illuminate when you switch the parking lamps on Powertrain malfunction reduced power Illuminates when a powertrain or an AWD fault has been Y detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder amp chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that t
84. hang more than 10 pounds 4 5 kilograms on the hook LOAD LIMIT Vehicle Loading With and Without a Trailer This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 214 Load Carrying PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the m
85. hold to fully close the moonroof Pull and release the control to close the sunshades The sunshades will stop short of the fully closed position Pull the control again and hold to fully close the sunshades Venting the Moonroof Press and release the TILT control to vent the moonroof Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 102 Instrument Cluster GAUGES Cluster shown in standard measure metric clusters similar A B C A Information display See Information displays for more information B Speedometer C Infotainment display SeeMyLincolnTouch M for more information WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS These lights can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Note Some warning indicators are reconfigurable telltales RTT These indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning light but do not display on startup 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 103 Adaptive cruise control if equipped RTT The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system is in e On gray light Il
86. if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 314 Wheels and Tires A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e exceed 50 mph 80 km h e load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e tow a trailer e use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e use commercial car washing equipment e try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort an
87. ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 166 Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage whi
88. increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the ignition off before fueling an inaccurate reading results if the engine is left running e Use the same fill rate low medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent Calculating Fuel Economy Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles 1600 kilometers of driving this is your engine s break in period a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles 3000 miles 3200 kilometers 4800 kilometers Also fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Calculate fuel economy as follows Standard Divide miles traveled by gallons used Metric Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by kilometers traveled 2013 MKX
89. is achieved Attach the tether strap afterward if included with the child seat Using Tether Straps GE Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap RAL which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 30 Child Safety The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view 4 8 b Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors Note If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash 1 Route the child safety seat teth
90. is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable laws Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel Corresponding information is displayed in the information display Information Display Controls e Press the up and down arrow buttons to seroll through and highlight the options within a menu e Press the right arrow button to enter a sub menu e Press the left arrow button to exit a menu e Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting messages The small squares in the upper right corner display the different menu levels and how far in the menu levels you are Main menu From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display you can choose from the following categories Display Mode Trip 1 amp 2 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Information Displays 109 ry Fuel Economy ra Settings EN Information Scroll up down to highlight one of the categories then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu Display Mode Use the up down arrow buttons to choose between the 7 following display options XXX mi m to empty X J Bar tachometer x J x Round tachometer J X X gauge Intelligent A
91. juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth CLEANING LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft amp Vinyl Cleaner Dry the area with a soft cloth e If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors e To check for compatibility first test any c
92. key in the ignition does not have admin optional settings privileges e No keys are programmed to the vehicle See the Creating a MyKey chapter e The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See the Using MyKey with Remote Start System chapter I cannot clear the e Key in the ignition does not have admin restricted keys privileges e No restricted keys are programmed to the vehicle See the Creating a MyKey chapter e The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See the Using MyKey with Remote Start System chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 68 MyKey key dealer SecuriLock in the Security chapter I accidentally e The vehicle has a remote start system that programmed all keys is recognized as an admin key See the Using as restricted keys MyKey with Remote Start System chapter to reset all restricted keys using remote start No restricted key e An admin key is present at engine start up functions with e No restricted keys are programmed to the intelligent access key vehicle See the Creating a MyKey chapter push button start Restricted key e An unknown key has been programmed to programmed total the vehicle as a restricted key includes one additional e The vehicle is equipped with a remote start key system See the Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems chapter Admin k
93. ls Utility NOORS 2o pae PR eee asd DS E ae Aes Hae Vehicle loading udi Exi AEN BS el edad ERES Towing Trailer towIng ca eue E ERR HE SEHR EY Ue OEE Wrecker TOWING ss ee ae terdan ha RP eee ede eee Recreational towing 2 sese or RES Driving Hints Economical drivinB o ooo ooo Driving through water llle Floor Mats eraat Saas WAS raton Gea ERU aret Sipe wer RR Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance llle Hazard warning flashers llle F uel cut off SWwItChi iiU a ER Jump starting the vehicle o o o o ooooooo eee 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 6 Table of Contents Customer Assistance 240 Reporting safety defects U S only o ooo ooo ooo 247 Reporting safety defects Canada only o o o oo ooo oo 247 Fuses 248 Changing a fuse co ee GEAR a a Yao RR ERA 248 Fuse specification chart o oooooooo ooo ooo o 249 Maintenance 257 General information 257 Opening and closing the hood 200000000000 258 Under hood overview sss rs 259 Engine Oil dipstick uiv Ea eee ala RARIOR RE a 260 Engine oll check Loses ageres et ey ROO de ANDE Re tn 260 Engine coolant check s 25 essen od epe eoe e Ys 261 Automatic transmission fluid check 0 o oo ooooooo o 265 Brake fhuidocheck xxxv X ewe 604465045 e e desea xus 267 IS oec eret unt P
94. make it difficult to see through the windshield WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 262 Maintenance WARNING Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty Note During normal vehicle operation the engine coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be drained the system to be flushed or the engine coolant to be replaced e DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle Make sure the correct coolant is used Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine s cooling system The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty e n case of emergency a large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained chemically
95. map zooms out To turn the feature off just press the or button again 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 426 MyLincoln Touch Map Icons Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle It A stays in the center of the map display except when in scroll mode the center of the screen The map position closest to the cursor Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map the fixed icon is in is in a window on the top center part of the screen 2 Address book entry default icon s indicates the location on wy the map of an address book entry This is the default symbol shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any method other than the map You can select from any of the 22 icons available You can use each icon more than once Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the home position You can only save one address from the Address Book as your Home entry You cannot change this icon POI Point Of Interest icons indicate locations of any point of interest categories you choose to display on the map You can choose to display about 56 point of interest subcategories on the map at one time Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and represents the position of the waypoint in the route list Destination symbol in
96. mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Keys and Remote Control 59 4 Insert a new battery with the facing downward Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing 5 Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the backup key Memory Feature This feature allows you to recall the driver seat power mirrors and power steering column memory positions Press the unlock button on the remote control or activate intelligent access to recall memory The seat power mirrors and steering column automatically move to the memory position The mirrors will move to the programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position The seat will move to the final position when the ignition is switched out of off if easy entry feature is enabled Programming Memory to the Transmitter To activate this feature 1 Move the memory features to the desired positions using the associated controls 2 Press and hold button 1 for five seconds A tone will 1 sound confirming memory position has been set Continue aU to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds l 3 Within three seconds press the lock button on the remote control 4 Wait 10 seconds then press the unlock button on the remote control 5 Repeat this procedure for memory button 2 and another transmitter if desired 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 60 Keys and Remote Control Deactiva
97. not function properly when ACC is activated because the brakes are electronically controlled Failing to do so may result in loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury WARNING Do not use tires sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of ACC Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control which could result in serious injury A message regarding a blocked sensor is displayed if the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille A vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the system will not function when the radar signals are obstructed The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Cruise Control 199 The surface of the radar in the Clean the grille surface in front of grille is dirty or obstructed in the radar or remove the object some way causing the obstruction The surface of the radar in the Wait a short time It may take grille is clean but the message several minutes for the radar to remains in the display detect that it is no longer obstructed Heavy rain or snow is interfering Do not use ACC in these condition with the radar signals because it may not detect warn or respond to potential collisions Swirling water or snow or ice on Do not use ACC in these condit
98. of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 450 Index DLT ASSISUM esee 399 Audio system see Radio 125 A Automatic transmission driving an automatic Overdrive sssseseeeeee 166 ABS see Brakes s 180 nid adding soos ecccssssesseeceeeseee 266 Accessing and using your fluid checking 266 USB POTT octets ii ero tea 377 fluid refill capacities 321 fluid specification 321 A lendar ou d oos 999 Selectshift SST 167 ccessory delay sesoses O nott fadi ce sco 373 Adaptive Cruise Control 191 A Addi x h 385 Auxiliary powerpoint 149 dome PAE a PRONE asii ANN inputs e 126 382 Airbag supplemental restraint A es E
99. or any objects over an airbag module Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules o KE crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness t indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter e front passenger sensing system 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 46 Supplementary Restraints System Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 centimeters between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position Aft
100. or during heavy braking or when stopping suddenly Max 30 When you use them properly the seat head restraint safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash We recommend that you follow these guidelines e Do not recline the seat back more than 30 degrees from vertical e Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible e Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible remaining comfortable e Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel We recommend a minimum of 10 inches 250 millimeters between your breastbone and the airbag cover e Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Seats 133 e Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully e Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion
101. possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions These are examples of acceptable condensation e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 276 Maintenance These are examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Replacing headlamp bulbs WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Note If the bulb is accidentally touched it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position 2 Open the hood 3 Remove the bulb cover 4 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it 5 Disconnect the electrical connector
102. power steering system that requires service immediately See your authorized dealer Power Steering Assist The power steering system has disabled power Fault steering assist due to a system error See your authorized dealer 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Information Displays 121 MyKey Messages Action Description Safely MyKey cannot be programmed Speed Limited to xx Displayed when starting the vehicle and MPH km h MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Vehicle Near MyKey Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Top Speed MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Vehicle Near MyKey Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Top Speed MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Check Speed Drive Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Safely optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds preselected speed Buckle Up to Unmute Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Audio Belt Minder is activated Could Not Program Displayed when an attempt is made to Key program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Park Aid Messages Action Description Check Park Aid Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the park aid is disabled Check Rear Park Aid Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the park aid is disabled Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the rear park ai
103. preset lt gt AM autoset preset lt gt FM 2 preset lt gt 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 370 MyLincoln Touch AM preset lt gt FM lt 87 9 107 9 gt FM 879 1079 HD lt t gt _ _________ Tf available SIRIUSO Satellite Radio If Activated Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen then select the J SIRIUS tab When you select You can Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished ALERT Save the current song artist or team as a favorite The system alerts you when it plays again on any SIRIUS channel Replay Replay audio on the current channel You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current station Changing stations erases the previous audio While in replay mode 1 Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song 2 Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the current track 3 Press play or pause to play or pause the audio 4 Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the feature to replay audio Hear a brief sampling of channels 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 371 Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass Midrange Treble Balan
104. pressed without the brake pedal being applied This is a reminder that the brake pedal must be applied when the start stop button is pressed in order to start the engine Restart Now or Key is Displayed when the start stop button is Needed pressed to shut off the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle Accessory Power Displayed when the vehicle is in the accessory Active ignition state 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 120 Information Displays Keys and Intelligent Action Description Access Messages Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle s starting system See your authorized dealer for service Maintenance Action Description Messages LOW Engine Oil Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible Pressure turn off the engine Check the oil level If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is Soon 1096 or less Oil Change Required Temp temperature is excessively high Low one quarter full Check the washer fluid level Service Now service See your authorized dealer Service Power Steering The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service See your authorized dealer Service Power Steering The power steering system has detected a Now condition within the
105. process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Transmission 169 Brake shift interlock WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING When doing this procedure you will be taking the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely To avoid unwanted vehicle movement always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure Use wheel chocks if appropriate 4 WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Use the BSI lever to move the gearshift lever from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead battery Apply the parking brake turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key 1 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry off and remove the Brake shift interlock access panel 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 170 Transmission 2 Locate the brake shift interlock lever in front of the shifter assembly 3 Apply the brake pedal Gently push and hold the brake shift interlock lever while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutr
106. properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the ON lamp and remain illuminated If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat back in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 49 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Passenger Airbag n Occupant Passenger Airbag Disabled L nlit Child Disabled Enabled Note When the passenger airbag status indicator OFF lamp is illuminated the passenger side airbag seat mounted may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit
107. rear quarter panel accessible from the liftgate or behind the rear seat Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped Do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 volts DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point and to avoid discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 150 Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking acceleration or collisions including hot drinks which may spill Available console features include A Cupholders B Utility compartment with in bin powerpoint removable coin holder removable storage tray and intelligent access key slot C Rear powerpoint D An individual latch will either open the entire armrest to access the utility compartment or allow each armrest to slide separately OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your option package Press near the rear edge of the door to open it 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA f
108. seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 44 Supplementary Restraints System The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags do not inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag Note You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys This is normal The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds for example baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag
109. sit all the way back against their vehicle seat with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion e Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 22 Child Safety Types of Booster Seats e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat e High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child Safety 23 Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and res
110. spare tire cover amp 4 Remove the wing nut securing the n spare tire by turning it counterclockwise O 5 Remove the washer temporary spare and jack assembly from the cargo area 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 317 D 6 Block the diagonally opposite E D wheel y Oe T Loosen each wheel lug nut ae d one half turn counterclockwise but O do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 8 The vehicle jacking points are shown here and are depicted on the yellow warning label on the jack Note Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle Oe 4G 9 Small arrow shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking points 10 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 11 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 318 Wheels and Tires 12 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 13 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown See Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications later in this D chapter for the proper lug nut torque C u specification o OQ Stowing the Flat Spare Tire and Jack Note If you are stowing a flat 22 inc
111. sure the system correctly plays your request 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 380 MyLincoln Touch SD Card and USB Voice Commands EM If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card press the us voice button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card press the voice button and after the tone say USB or SD card then any of the commands in the following chart USB or SD CARD Play podcast episode lt name gt Play similar music Play song lt name gt Play TV show lt name gt Play TV show episode lt name gt Play video lt name gt Play artist lt name gt Play video podcast episode lt name gt Play video playlist lt name gt Previous Repeat all Repeat off Repeat one Shuffle Shuffle off What s this Help If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card the system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse When prompted see the following Browse chart These commands are only available in USB mode and are device dependent 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 381 BROWSE Album lt name gt All video podcasts p All albums All videos All artists
112. system and help diagnose any problems that may occur The cellular profile media device index and development log remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicles SYNC module Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent a court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada For further privacy information see the sections on 911 Assist Vehicle Health Report and Traffic Directions and Information 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 355 ACCESSING AND ADJUSTING MODES THROUGH YOUR RIGHT VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY a 100120 N 14 169150 200 180 4 T 220 The display is located on the right side of your instrument cluster You can use your steering wheel controls to view and make minor adjustments to active modes without taking your hands off the wheel For example In Entertainment mode you can view
113. that broadcasts a variety of music sports news weather traffic and entertainment programming Your factory installed SIRIUS satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle See your authorized dealer for availability SATELLITE RADI iO For more information on extended subscription terms a service fee is required the online media player and a list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels and other features please visit www siriusxm com in the United States www sirius ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio electronic serial number ESN You need your ESN to activate modify or track your satellite radio account The ESN is on the System Information Screen SR ESN XXXXXXXXXXXX To access your ESN press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen then SIRIUS gt Options 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 374 MyLincoln Touch Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues Antenna For optimal reception performance keep the obstructions antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger s
114. the Doors Press the button to lock all the doors The turn signals will e illuminate Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed The doors will lock again the horn will sound and the turn signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are closed 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 70 Locks Note If any door or the luggage compartment is open or if the hood is open on vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm or remote start the horn will sound twice and the lamps will not flash Power Liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using power liftgate control AN WARNING Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust 5 fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle Note Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate 5 EB Press twice within three seconds to open or close the liftgate xJ or to reverse the movement Activating Intelligent Access The intelligent access key must be within 3 feet 1 meter of your vehicle At the Front Doors Pull a front exterior door handle The door will unlock and can be opened Press and hold the door handle lock sensor to lock yo
115. to use electric trailer brakes 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Towing 223 Your vehicle may tow a Class I or III trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart Ib kg weight Ib kg drive drive 3 7L TiVCT all wheel 8440 3828 2000 907 drive 3 7L TiVCT all wheel 8440 3828 3500 1588 drive Vehicles not equipped with a trailer towing package and vehicles equipped with 22 inch wheels are limited to a 2000 pound 907 kilogram trailer weight Vehicles equipped with a trailer towing package ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Follow these guidelines for safe towing e Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles 1600 kilometers e Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer e See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer See your scheduled maintenance information e f you use a rental trailer follow the instructions the rental agency gives you For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle s load refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle lo
116. until the shifter is moved out of the manual position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 168 Transmission If your vehicle is equipped with paddles on the steering wheel e Pull the left paddle to downshift the transmission e Pull the right paddle to upshift the transmission hd A Upshift to the recommended shift speeds according to the following chart recommended for best fuel economy 85mph 40km h O 25 mph 40 km h The instrument cluster will show the selected gear you are currently in In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM which may cause it to stall SelectShift will automatically make some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time It will still allow you to downshift at any time as long as SelectShift determines that the engine will not be damaged from over revving Note Return the gear shift lever from S Sport to D Drive when manual control is no longer desired Note Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts soft shifts or both This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning
117. what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in R Reverse The system uses two types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle 1 Fixed guidelines Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line which can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the vehicle 2 Centerline Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object i e a trailer Note If the transmission is in R Reverse and the liftgate is ajar no rear view camera features are displayed Note If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer Note When towing the camera only sees what is being towed behind the vehicle This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen In some vehicles the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged Note The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions e Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating e The camera s view is obstructed by mud water or debris Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner e The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged causing the camera to become misaligned Adjusting the Rear View Camera Settings To access any of the rear view camera system setti
118. what is now playing change the audio source select memory presets and make some adjustments In Phone mode you can accept or reject an incoming call If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation you can view the current route or activate a route In Climate mode the driver side temperature can be set as well as fan speed Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll through the available modes Entertainment Phone 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 356 MyLincoln Touch ES Navigation LE Climate You can make selections from the menu by using the OK button The selection menu expands and different options appear e Press the up and down arrows to scroll through the modes e Press the right arrow to enter the mode e Press the left or right arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode e Press OK to confirm your selection Note If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation Compass appears in the display instead of Navigation If you press the right arrow to go into the Compass menu you can see the compass graphic The compass displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling not true direction i e if the vehicle is traveling west the middle of the compass graphic displays west north displays to the left of west though its true direction is to the right of west USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features usin
119. when the vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake When this feature is active the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope for example from a car park ramp traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space This feature is activated automatically on any slope that can result in significant vehicle rollback This feature will not operate if the parking brake is activated Using Hill Start Assist Note If the engine is revved excessively hill start assist will be deactivated 1 Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill Keep the brake pedal pressed 2 If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope the hill start assist feature will be activated automatically 3 When you remove your foot from the brake pedal the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three seconds This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off 4 Drive off in the normal manner The brakes will be released automatically 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 172 All Wh
120. with heavy loads or in hilly terrain The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become less effective e f your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow Haul feature use this feature when towing This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 226 Towing e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached Anticipate stops and brake gradually e Avoid parking on a grade However if you must park on a grade 1 Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow 2 Set your vehicle parking brake 3 Place the automatic transmission in position P or manual transmission in a high gear 4 Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels Chocks not included with vehicle Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft PWC Note Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Note Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e Do not allow wa
121. within 30 seconds of starting the sequence Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if any steps are performed out of sequence Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Place the new unprogrammed intelligent access key with the buttons facing down in the pocket inside of the center console 2 Press the driver or passenger power door unlock control three times 3 Press and release the brake pedal one time 4 Press the driver or passenger power door lock control three times 5 Press and release the brake pedal one time The indicator on the START STOP button should begin to rapidly flash indicating the programming mode has been entered and two programmed intelligent access keys have been detected in the vehicle 6 Press the START STOP button within one minute A message will appear in the information display indicating that the new intelligent access key was programmed 7 Remove the intelligent access key from the center console pocket and press the unlock button on the newly programmed intelligent access key to exit programming mode 8 Verify that the remote entry functions operate press lock then unlock making sure you end in unlock and that the vehicle starts with new intelligent access key 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Security 81 ANTI THEFT ALARM The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle The turn signal lamps
122. 2 CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM The system is located in the floor of the cargo area Lift the release handle to open 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 212 Load Carrying ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS IF EQUIPPED WARNING When loading the roof rail crossbars it is recommended to evenly distribute the load as well as maintain a low center of gravity Loaded vehicles with higher centers of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Note The maximum recommended load is 100 pounds 45 kilograms evenly distributed on the crossbars Note Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel The roof panel is not designed to directly carry a load For proper function of the roof rack system loads must be placed directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails Your vehicle may be equipped with factory installed crossbars Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle are also recommended for use with your roof rack system Make sure that the load is securely fastened Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Load Carrying 213 UTILITY HOOK The utility hook can be used to hang small items such as grocery bags etc Do not
123. 40 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Towing 221 TOWING A TRAILER WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Note For information on electrical items such as fuses or rel
124. ARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone with SYNC This allows you to use your phone in a hands free manner Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1 Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen 2 Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is in the proper mode See your phone s user guide if necessary 3 When prompted on your phone s display enter the six digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display The display indicates when the pairing is successful and asks you if you want to download your phonebook SYNC may prompt you with more phone options For more information on your phone s capability see your phone s user guide and visit the website Pairing Subsequent Phones Note Put the transmission in position P Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio 1
125. ASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM Note The system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Metallic objects electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to the key when starting the engine Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine Switch the ignition off move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine if a problem occurs Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle The system is an engine immobilization system It is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting A message may appear in the information display If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key a malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information display Automatic Arming Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off Automatic Disarming Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key Replacement Keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two intelligent access keys The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the
126. Child Safety 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming e from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out Note The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode You should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight for example by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child Safety 27 This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle Sometimes a sl
127. During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C mode adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into position P to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance in AUTO press MAX A C For maximum cooling performance in manual override control 1 Choose Panel A C and recirculation controls 2 Set the temperature to LO 3 Set the fan to the highest blower setting To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather 1 Select Defrost or Floor Defrost mode To maximize performance select Defrost 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS Heated Rear Window Note The vehicle must be running to use this feature Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog Press the control again within 15 minutes to switch it off It turns off automatically after approximately 15 minutes or when you switch the ignition off Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines Your warranty does not cover this damage Heated Exterior Mirror Note Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scra
128. ENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU AS IS NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 449 NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER O Gracenote 2007 FCC ID KMHSYNCG2 IC 1422A SYNCG2 This device complies with Part 15
129. EU Rute ade or E 268 Washer fluid check oooooooooo ooo ooo 268 Changing the vehicle battery llle 268 Checking the wiper blades 0 000000000002 pisa 271 Changing the wiper blades o o o oo 000000 ee eee eee 271 Air PIER CS sch a as ias at iaa 272 Adjusting the headlamps lille 273 Changing a bulb Jaen kt x Rn ea BOR a des 275 Bulb sp cification chart eiee rea ere cbe ger er Ty 280 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Table of Contents T Vehicle Care 281 Cleaning Products sa duae xata a R ed X dede e Rs 281 Cleaning the exteriO brisas dai Rede RET 281 WAXING ze deiode Ex PN MM ES E pd UN ma EA 283 Repairing minor paint damage lesen 283 Cleaning the engine s osse d x cde pue a e 9 Y eb XS GS 283 Cleaning the windows and wiper bladeS 284 Cleaning the interit sey renke ved ia A P AUS 284 Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens 285 Cleaning leather SE 2229s e be a OS USE RA 286 Cleaning the alloy wheels oi ias PERLE a 286 Vehicle stot f ie Dx b RR EG AR E E AGREE ER 287 Wheels and Tires 290 A A O 292 Using Snow Chains sceri EXER E a a 307 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 308 Changing a road Wheel ste creere tiae eean ee 313 Technical specifications o o oooo ene 319 Wheel Tug nut Torque 4 secco t rem ba e RR 319 Capacities and Specificat
130. European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association B 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire C 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width D R Indicates a radial type tire E 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter F 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your owner s manual If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law G H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law M 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing U
131. Key Your vehicle is equipped with two intelligent access keys which operate the power locks and the remote start system The key must be in the vehicle to activate the push button start system The intelligent access key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that can be used to unlock the driver door Slide the release on the back of the transmitter to release the mechanical key blade then pull the blade out 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 58 Keys and Remote Control Note Your vehicle s back up keys were issued with a security tag that DD Information Keep the tad in amp safe information Keep the tag in a safe 1031X place for future reference Replacing the Battery Note Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board Note Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the vehicle The transmitter should operate normally The remote control uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent Intelligent Access Transmitter 1 Remove the backup key from the transmitter 2 Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the backup key head to remove the battery cover Do not use the backup key to remove the cover or you could damage the intelligent access key 3 Remove the old battery a 2013 MKX
132. LE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 e THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE End user notice Microsoft Windows Mobile for Automotive Important Safety Information This system Ford SYNC contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement Any removal reproduction reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action Read and follow instructions Before using your Windows Automotive based system read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual User s Guide Not following precautions found in this User s Guide can lead to an accident or other serious consequences Keep User s Guide in Vehicle When kept in the vehicle the User s Guide will be a ready reference for you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive based system Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the User s Guide and read its instructions and safety information carefully 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 436 Appendices WARNING Operating certain parts of this system while driving can distract your atte
133. MEER E MH AMD Safety seats for children 19 24 SIRIUS Travel Link 396 Safety Compliance SIRIUS Travel Link voice Certification Label 995 commands eee orti en 397 Satellite Radio 125 870 SOS Post Crash Alert 44 Scheduled Maintenance Guide Spark plugs Normal Scheduled specifications 320 324 Maintenance and Log 337 Specification chart ECHO sind 126 377 418 libricants eeeeeeeeeeee 321 Seat belts Stability system sss 183 see Safety restraints 34 Starting your vehicle 154 Keats e cooncnararass 139 jump starting 236 child safety seats 19 24 push button start system 151 climate control ss 138 easy access easyout feature 137 Steering wheel 82 front seats 135 137 controls E TAT 84 heated sssrin 142 tting ss 82 83 memory seat 59 136 Supplemental Restraint System second row Seats eee 139 SRS see airbags 45 Second row power fold seat 140 Supported media file types 381 SecuriCode keyless entry Supported player media SV SUC ene e UR ees ME TT formats and metadata SecuriLock passive anti theft INFOMATION id 381 SYSUOT L ir S 79 SYNC customer support 352 Sending new text messages 388 SYNC Services
134. N and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to the Capacities and Specifications chapter for the proper fluid type FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications See the technical specifications chart in the Capacities amd Specifications chapter Note The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and
135. NC Services and Applications section Phone Ringer Select what ring tone you would like to hear when you receive a call Choose from possible system ring tones your currently paired phone s ring tone a beep text to speech or if you would like the notification to be silent Text Message Select a text message notification if supported Notification by your phone Choose from possible system alert tones text to speech or silent Internet Data Use this screen to adjust your internet data Connection connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more information Manage Phonebook _ Access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Be alerted to when your phone is in roaming mode If compatible 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 391 Phone Voice Commands ES Press the voice button on the steering wheel control After the i tone say any of the following commands Go to hands free These commands are only available during an active call If you have said Messages see the following Messages chart MESSAGES Listen to t
136. NTROL In certain situations for example stuck in snow or mud turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full engine power Turn off the traction control system through the information display See the Information Displays chapter System Indicator Lights and Messages WARNING If a failure has been detected within the Traction Control System the stability control light will illuminate steadily Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled using the information display control If the stability control light still illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with Traction Control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine PP Start up and flashes when a driving condition activates the stability system Y The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine H EE start up and stays on when the traction control system is turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system When the traction control system is turned off or on a message appears in the information display showing system status 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 182 Stability Control PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system afte
137. Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 260 Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK A MIN B MAX ENGINE OIL CHECK Note Check the level before starting the engine Note Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks 1 Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean lint free cloth Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level If the level is at the MIN mark add oil immediately Adding Engine Oil Note Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running Note Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Council ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers 1 Remove the filler cap 2 Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications See Capacities and Specifications for more information 3 Replace the filler cap Turn it until you feel a strong resistance 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 261 ENGINE COOLANT CHECK Checking the Engine Coolant The concentrati
138. SA fus Wheels and Tires 297 Speed rating mph km h 168 mph 270 km h 186 mph 299 km h Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR H U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall I M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT AII Terrain or AS All Season J Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others K Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire See the Safety Compliance C
139. SHIELD WIPERS Note Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before turning on the windshield wipers Note Make sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash Note Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears If that does not resolve the issue install new wiper blades Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers Rotate toward you to decrease the speed of the wipers Press the stalk down and release for a single swipe of the wipers Speed Dependent Wipers If Equipped When your vehicle speed increases the interval between wipes will decrease when intermittent wipe is selected RAIN SENSING WIPERS IF EQUIPPED Note Wet road conditions may result in inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing Lower the sensitivity switch to normal or high speed wiping or turn the wipers off to reduce smearing Note Turn off the wipers before entering a car wash Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity to one of the interval moisture settings The wipers will not cycle until moisture is detected on the windshield The wiper speed will vary based on the amount of moisture detected on the windshield and the sen
140. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required SOS POST CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn intermittently in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag equipped on your vehicle such as front side side curtain or Safety Canopy The horn and lamps will turn off when e the hazard control button is pressed e the panic button if equipped is pressed on the remote entry transmitter or e your vehicle runs out of power 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 45 DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS WARNING Never place your arm
141. T WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME p This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the kea driver s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle s ignition is turned on Conditions of Operation The driver s safety belt is not buckled The safety belt warning light before the ignition switch is turned to illuminates 1 2 minutes and the on position the warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds The driver s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light while the indicator light is illuminated and warning chime turn off and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light before the ignition switch is turned to and indicator chime remain off the on position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Safety Belts 39 SAFETY BELT MINDERO This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light when the driver s or front passenger s seat is occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to front seat occupants as determined by the front passenge
142. T Wd uorjeogi odgs PIO HA J9quinw Jed PLOT epeue TIO 10301 9NSYju g OMS AVS G J 1940 0 N e epeuey TO 10 0 uNTWeIg iodng OG MS AVS OIJLL910I0N e sn TIO 103011 Nys NY OG MG HVS OIJL1910I0N e Sn TO 1010 pue g oneuquds umrmuoAq OGMG AVS G 1J 104030 A jueoriqn 1907 pue Suneroeueq OIJRIOLOJOTA 9seo18 UNIT 9sea1r osodanq nmyy jueoniqnT Ae1dg suog PMA oeg OPA 1030 N LOG SIUBULIOJI9 Y USIH OIJRIDIOIOJA 9ureN Weg pio Tg syrenb r9 JIOAI9SOI UO X VIN pue NIW ueeA3oq Aypedey SIoput A5 yoo dsuly 100p IY PNJ pue ser yeas saoyejd Joxuns sogurq 100p yore pooy Arerrxne YOT pooy Yr 100 T SATIISIDYJLIM 100q ping oyeg SNOILVOIJIO3dS 1VOINHO3 L Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing 2013 MKX mkx USA fus Capacities and Specifications 322 cV 9TH8W dSM epeueo 4 pue q g v 2e 0XO SA v ee 0z V 66IOcIWW ISA TO OPTMSLAX V L6TOCNW dSM TO 06M08 AX AT ONODAAN NIO OT LX AT ONODAAN NTIO 0T LX GU PPELEN SSM Cepeueo g TIE DADO SQ E TIGE DA uorjeongroodg PIO HA 19QUINN Weg PIO HA epeueo PIJA I9useA PIeTyspuim Ayen umrmuoI1q SN 91e1uoouo J9uSeA p I9rusputa UIDIUISJd J 191030 N jueoniqnT 9 xy reoj oneuqu g OV I MSA AVS G3 151010 X jueoniqnT 9 Xy 1894 UNTW9IJ 06 M08 AVS Ie19 10 OJ ALV NI NOOUUN amp 3 191030 X XIV NI JIOAI9S9J UO X VIN ONODAAN e110 O T poy peld yue OOD eZIoIJIUY
143. TeleNav Software including without limitation all related intellectual property rights No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to or shall be granted or conferred by implication statute inducement estoppel or otherwise and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement 8 3 By using the TeleNav Software you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications including notices agreements legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software collectively Notices electronically TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav s Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software 8 4 TeleNav s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party s right to require performance at any time thereafter nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself 8 5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect 8 6 The h
144. The heated seats only operate when the ignition is on To operate the heated seats e Press the indicated side of the control for maximum heat e Press again to deactivate e Press the indicated side of the control for minimum heat e Press again to deactivate The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle While the ignition is in the on position activating the high or low heated seat switch enables heating mode When activated they will turn off automatically when the engine is turned off The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been activated 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Universal Garage Door Opener 143 HOMELINKO WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage MN WARNING Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Note Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming Note We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons See Erasing the function button code
145. USA fus Appendices 431 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS Speech Recognition If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component s you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Limitations on Distributing Copying Modifying and Creating Derivative Works You may not distribute copy make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Single EULA The end user documentation for the DEVICE and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs such as multiple translations and or multiple media versions e g in the user documentation and in the software Even if you receive multiple EULAs you are licensed to use only one 1 copy of the SOFTWARE SOFTWARE Transfer You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only
146. WD X Total odometer TYou can also choose to have only the fuel gauge show in this mode Refer to Display gt Gauge Display found in the table under the Settings section later in this chapter Regardless of display mode chosen when SelectShift Automatic transmission SST is activated the cluster will change to the round tachometer if not already selected After the round tachometer displays other display modes with the bar tachometer can also be chosen e XXX mi km to empty Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel tank reaches empty The value is dynamic and can change raise or lower depending on driving style 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 110 Information Displays Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade When the fuel level becomes low 50 miles 80 km to empty the level indicator will change to amber When the fuel level becomes critically low 0 miles 0 km to empty the level indicator will change to red Note When a MyKey is in use low fuel warnings will display earlier The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Bar Round tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine During SelectShift Aut
147. When prompted enter a four digit PIN After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the PIN again Settings Access and adjust system settings voice features as well as phone navigation and wireless settings System Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt System then select from the following Select to have the touchscreen display in English Spanish or French Fahrenheit Volume system Beep choices made through the touchscreen Touch Panel Button Select to have the system beep to confirm Beep button choices made through the climate or audio system QWERTY or ABC format the current software licenses Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults This erases all personal settings and personal data 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 407 Voice Control Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Voice Control then select from the following Voice Control Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interaction and guidance Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Have the system ask you short questions if it Prompts has not clearly heard or understood your request Note Even with confirmation prompts turned off the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings Media Candidate Candidate lists are possible results from your Lists voice commands The system simply makes a
148. When the vehicle is started the lamps track left to right then back to center to alert the driver that the system is working properly There is a delay of two to five seconds before the adaptive headlamp system will operate when the vehicle is driven as the system is inactive below 3 mph 5 km h 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Lighting 93 DIRECTION INDICATORS The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or downward position when activated The turn signal control activation and cancellation is electronic dt e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn y signal e Push the lever again in either direction to manually cancel turn signal operation Note Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash only three times to indicate a lane change INTERIOR LAMPS Dome lamp control Use to manually turn the dome lamp on 2 e Press the control This will turn on the interior courtesy lights The lights will remain on until the control is pressed again 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 94 Lighting Front Row Map Lamps If Equipped To turn on the map lamps press the outer edge of the clear lens The front row map lamp lights when e any door is opened e the dome lamp button on the instrument panel is activated e the remote entry controls are AF A pressed and the ignition is off
149. Windows and Mirrors 95 Power WindOWS 4 4 coraenr ke ewe de Ree E 95 Exterior MITOS gee ar echt eee Beene ERE S eene de PR ais 96 Interior MATTLONS o EE OO AG A OY a eS 98 UM VISO S a id a E we 99 MOONYOOE dui Rache d Hew AAS Bes WE RAS EE YO 100 Instrument Cluster 102 GAUGES 4 gave te deed da a eee Ee Weed bese Gave d REA 102 Warning lamps and indicators 0 00 0002 ee eee 102 Audible warnings and indicators llle 107 Information Displays 108 CONTO Sunat dar nts GA Bnd oes ee get Fak o eee E 108 Information Messages 4 66 5 secs be e E TE 114 Audio System 123 MyLincoln Touch system ooo 125 Climate Control 127 Dual automatic temperature control o o o o o ooo o 127 Rear window defroster eee 129 Cabin air AE oe eal a oe eke Oe bm RAV EET 130 Seats 132 Sitting in the correct position 0 000 000 eri pai ri 132 Head re strambsz 22e A Pe A qan E SUR X MUS 133 Power seIs ned ad T AWO iaa 135 Memory funeblon zac eser eR RA Ewe EERE ES 136 Heated and cooled seats 2 0 137 Rear SeabS ca hen Eee ds iurc Ue e qe 139 Universal Garage Door Opener 143 HomeLink wireless control system 0000000 o 144 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 4 Table of Contents Auxiliary Power Points 149 Storage Compartments 150 Center console 5 2 eu RT PIA CEG aaa 150 Overhead console 4 ses ku ara 150 Starting and Stopping the En
150. XXXXIKXKKKKK TIRES peaXXXKIKKXXKKK Tikes Which transmission each code XXXX IMS XX R XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX kPa XX PSLCOLD AT XXX KPa XX PSI COLD represents THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXTPNT XX RC XX DSO EN INTTR PPS TR TAXLE SPR XXXXX XXX XX XX Lxx xxx XXXAXXXXXXXXX A XXXX XXXXXXX XX 6 speed automatic transmission 6F50 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Accessories 327 ACCESSORIES For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at Accessories Lincoln com U S only Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Lincoln or Lincoln of Canada dealer Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Lincoln Custom Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12000 miles 20000 kilometers whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty Exterior style e Side windo
151. a in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile Note If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot for example driven more than 1 mile 1 6 kilometers never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 302 Wheels and Tires Note Some spare tires operate at a hi
152. a Bluetooth enabled and compatible phone to SYNC e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident e A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage battery power and signal strength e The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U S Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 401 In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut off which would trigger 911 Assist however SYNC tries to contact emergency services if 911 Assist triggers If a connected phone sustains damage or loses connection to SYNC SYNC searches for and tries to connect to any available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911 Before making the call e SYNC provides a short window of time about 10 seconds to cancel the call If you fail to cancel the call SYNC attempts to dial 911 e SYNC says the following or a similar message SYNC will attempt to call 911 to cancel the call press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel If you do not cancel the call and SYNC makes a successful call a pre recorded message plays for the 911 operator and then the occupant s in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator Be prepared to provide your n
153. acement cost is the customer s responsibility e fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5 liters of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9 liters of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 30 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 kilometers of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 kilometers from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 kilometers Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 235 Vehicles sold in the U S Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference This card is found in the owner s manual portfolio in the glove compartment U S Lincoln vehicle customers w
154. ad when calculating the total vehicle weight 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 224 Towing Trailer Towing Connector Vehicles Equipped with a Trailer towing or Prep Package The trailer towing connector is located under the rear bumper on the left side of your vehicle 1 Dark Green Right turn signal brake lamp and hazard flasher Left turn signal brake lamp and hazard flasher Tail lamps and parking lamps 4 White Ground Hitches Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle Distribute the trailer load so 10 15 of the total trailer weight is on the tongue Safety Chains Note Never attach safety chains to the bumper Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch To connect the safety chains cross them under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations The rating for the tow vehicle s braking system operation is at the g
155. ade engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs hilly terrain or mountainous areas This will increase engine RPM during engine braking Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acceleration accelerator pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed e Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds SelectShift AutomaticO Transmission If Equipped Your SelectShift automatic transmission gives you the ability to manually change gears if you d like To use SelectShift move the gearshift lever into S Sport Now you can use select shift to manually change gears If your vehicle is equipped with buttons on the side of your gearshift lever e Press on the gearshift lever button to manually downshift the transmission e Press on the gearshift lever button to manually upshift the transmission Paddle Shifters if equipped The paddle shifters allow you to shift gears quickly without taking your hands off the steering wheel Temporary manual control is provided when pulling the paddles with the gearshift in the D Drive position The system will determine when temporary manual control is no longer desired and reverts back to automatic control Extensive manual control can be achieved by moving the shifter to the S Sport position The system will stay in manual control
156. ail devices text messaging devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 16 Introduction EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this owner s manual A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This owner s manual is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export See this owner s manual for all other required information and warnings 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child
157. aints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your owner s manual for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury All Wheel Drive System If Equipped WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of all wheel drive vehicles Although an all wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it will not stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed Note Your all wheel drive vehicle is not intended for off road use This feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty With the all wheel drive option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot The system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator For all wheel drive vehicles a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used A dissi
158. al position 4 Install the trim panel 5 Apply the brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake Note See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear HILL START ASSIST IF EQUIPPED WARNING The hill start assist feature does not replace the parking brake When you leave the vehicle always apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into P Park WARNING You must remain in the vehicle once you have activated the hill start assist feature WARNING During all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle supervising the hill start assist system and intervening if required 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Transmission 171 WARNING If the engine is revved excessively or if a malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active the hill start assist feature will be deactivated This feature makes it easier to pull away
159. all Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 232 Driving Hints FLOOR MATS WARNING Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways e Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury e Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to ensure mats do not shift out of position e Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle footwell that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle e Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already installed floor mats Floor mats should always rest on top of the vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation e Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis Always properly reinsta
160. allows you to use a previously stored wireless network You can categorize by alphabetical listing priority and signal strength You can also choose to search for a network connect to a network disconnect from a network receive more information prioritize a network or delete a network Gateway Access Point Mode makes SYNO an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on This forms the local area network within your vehicle for things such as game playing file transfer and internet browsing Press for more information Gateway Access Point Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNO as the internet gateway Gateway Access Point Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi Fi system 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 412 MyLincoln Touch USB Mobile Instead of using Wi Fi your system can also Broadband use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet You must turn on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the system This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on You can select the following Country Carrier Phone Number User Name and Password Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to conn
161. ame phone number and location immediately because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically 911 Assist May Not Work If e Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash e The vehicle s battery or SYNC system has no power e The phone s thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you turn on 911 Assist it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not turn the feature on 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 402 MyLincoln Touch Vehicle Health Report If Equipped U S Only WARNING Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions regularly inspect your vehicle and seek repair for any damage or problem you suspect Vehicle Health Report supplements but cannot replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection Vehicle Health Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system such
162. amples of vehicle use and its impact on engine oil change intervals it is provided as a guideline only Actual engine oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message Miles km Vehicle use and examples Normal commuting with highway driving No or moderate load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling 7500 10000 12000 16000 Severe Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off road conditions 5000 7499 8000 11999 Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation 3000 4999 xtreme 4000 7999 Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 338 Scheduled Maintenance Normal Scheduled Maintenance At every oil change Change engine oil and filter the information display tread depth recommended Inspect automatic transmission fluid level if equipped with dipstick Consult dealer for requirements brake linings hoses and parking brake Inspect engine cooling system strength and hoses Inspect exhaust system and heat shields Inspect rear axle and U joints Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings All wheel drive vehicles Inspect half shaft boots Inspect steering linkage ball joints suspension tie rod ends driveshaft and U joints Lubricate if equipped with grease fit
163. an one minute e Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings e Use the air conditioner or front defroster e Use the speed control in hilly terrain e Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Driving Hints 231 e Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer e Carry unnecessary weight approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 pounds 180 kilograms of weight carried e Add particular accessories to your vehicle e g bug deflectors rollbars or light bars running boards ski racks e Drive with the wheels out of alignment DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING Drive through water in an emergency only and not as part of normal driving WARNING Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter Note Driving through deep water may allow water into the transmission or air intake and can cause internal vehicle damage or cause it to stall Note Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may st
164. and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist BLISO aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone A The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet 3 meters beyond the bumper The system alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving BLISO aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone A The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet 3 meters beyond the bumper The system alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone while driving CTA warns the driver of vehicles approaching from the sides when the transmission is in R Reverse Note BLIS is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects or to detect parked vehicles people animals or infrastructure fences guardrails trees etc It is designed to alert the driver to vehicles in the blind zones Note When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone typically fewer than two seconds the system does not trigger 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Driving Aids 201 Using the Systems BLISO turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven forward above 3 mph 5 km h i
165. annel in the selected category e In CD mode press these buttons to select the previous or next track 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 126 Audio System Eject Press this button to eject a CD CD Slot Insert a CD TUNE and TUNE In radio mode press these buttons to manually search through the radio frequency band e n SIRIUS mode press these buttons to find the next or previous available satellite radio station e UO oO Uu E Volume Press the right or left side of the slider or slide your finger across the control to adjust the volume F Power Press this button to switch the system off and on MEDIA HUB The media hub is located behind a small access door in the instrument panel and has the following features A A N inputs B SD card slot C USB ports C For more information see the MyLincoln Touch chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Climate Control 127 DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM J l H G F E Note You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius See Settings in the MyLincoln Touch chapter A MyTemp Allows you to quickly adjust to a frequently used setting with a single touch Press and to increase and decrease the temperature Touch and hold MyTemp to save the current temperature To access the setting again touch the MyTemp indicator again B Fan speed control Press the rig
166. ap See Map mode later in this chapter Setting a Destination Press the green corner of your touchscreen then Dest when it appears Choose any of the following Latitude Longitude HAS 1 Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields in any order For address destination entry Go appears once all the necessary information has been entered Pressing Go makes the address location appear on the map If you choose Previous Destination the last 20 destinations you have selected appear 2 Select Set as Dest to make this your destination You can also choose to set this as a waypoint have the system route to this point on the way to your current destination or save it as a favorite The system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its route calculation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 419 3 Choose from up to three different types of routes and then select Start Route e Fastest Route Uses the fastest moving roads possible e Shortest Route Uses the shortest distance possible e Eco Route Uses the most fuel efficient route You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways tollroads ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use high occupancy vehicle lanes High occupancy vehicle lanes also known as carpool or diamond lanes People who ride in buses vanpools or car
167. apply to you Disclaimer of Liability NT AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS INJURY OR DAMAGES DIRECT OR INDIRECT WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT REVENUE CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY EVEN IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations so to that extent the above may not apply to you Export Control You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with and with all licenses and approvals required under applicable export laws rules and regulations including but not limited to the laws rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U S Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U S Department of Commerce To the extent that any such export laws rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying wit
168. ar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P Type Tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example A P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association TERA that may be used for service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans and light trucks 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 296 Wheels and Tires Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO
169. ary Restraints System 53 WARNING All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag WARNING If the curtain airbags have deployed the curtain airbags will not function again The curtain airbags including the A B C or D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the curtain airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain lateral crashes or rollover events the Safety Canopy will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events The system consists of e AR bd Y e safety canopy curtain airbags fitted above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wor
170. as star rating average cost review handicap access hours of operation and website address For hotels cityseekr can provide information such as star rating price category review check in and check out times hotel service icons and website address 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 423 Setting Your Navigation Preferences Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Navigation When you select Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off bottom or bottom to top Set the automatic parking points of interest notification When parking points of interest notification is on the icons display on the map when you get close to your destination This may not be very useful in dense areas and may clutter the map when other points of interest display Route Preferences Choose to have the system display the shortest route fastest route or most ecological route trains when planning your route if available Preferences only Have the system automatically fill in the state and province based on the information already entered into the system 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 424 MyLincoln Touch Traffic Preferences Choose how you want the system to handle traffic problems along your route Automatic Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic incidents that d
171. ately Stability Control System Off f Illuminates when AdvanceTrac Traction control has been CON disabled by the driver Direction Indicator Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard em warning flasher is turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster 107 AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key In Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Keyless Warning Alert If Equipped Sounds when the keyless vehicle is in RUN and the driver s door is opened Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 108 Information Displays GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their focus off the road Your primary responsibility
172. ation on T Type Tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires These differences are described below B C D E A i T145 80D16 is an example of a tire p 7 size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire E T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that is intended for temporary service on cars sport utility vehicles minivans and light trucks F 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire G 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall H D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire I 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See the payload description and graphic in the Load Carrying chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 300 Wheels and Tires INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires tha
173. ator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel Note The passenger airbag status indicator OFF and ON lamps will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is first turned on to confirm it is functional PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ON The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the passenger airbag status indicator will illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e f the child restraint has been installed and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the ON lamp then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting
174. avigation application If you find map data errors you may report them directly to Navteq by going to http mapreporter navteq com Navteq evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e mail Navigation Map Updates Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership by calling 1 800 NAVMAPS in Mexico call 01 800 557 5539 or going to www navigation com ford You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available Navigation Voice Commands EB When in navigation mode press the voice button on the us steering wheel control After the tone say any of the following commands Navigation System Voice Commands Cancel next waypoint Destination intersection Destination nearest lt POI category gt Destination street address These commands are only available when a navigation route is active If you have said the command Destination you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Destination chart 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 429 If you have said the command Navigation you may say any of the above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart DESTINATION Zoom street Zoom to distance Help If you have said Destination you may say any of the
175. aximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity how much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Load Carrying 215 Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL5 FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me se enormes SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 PS ADDITIONAL SPARE T145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PS INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY p FRONT p REN g NOMBRE DE PLACES y TOTAL AVANT 1 ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 492 kg or 1085 Le poids total des occupants et du charge
176. ays see the Fuses chapter Your vehicle s load capacity designation is by weight not by volume so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components periodically during and after any towing operation Load Placement To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving e Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor e Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires e Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight e Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected the trailer frame should be level or slightly angled down toward your vehicle when viewed from the side When driving with a trailer or payload a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight You can find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter and in the RV amp Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 222 Towing TRAILER SWAY CONTROL IF
177. be programmed to operate with the garage door opener Programing the transmitters To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode To do this A Red LED B Green LED A B 1 Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The LED light will change from green to green and red 2 Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming mode If done properly the LED light will appear red 3 Hold the transmitter within 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters of the button on the sun visor you want to program 4 Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program The indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Universal Garage Door Opener 147 Note the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again If the Genie transmitter LED displays green and red release the button until the LED turns off before pressing the button again Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode To do this 1 Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand held transmitter for 10 seconds The indicator light w
178. cated below by X LATCH LATCH lower lower Restraint Child anchors anchors Type Weight Rear facing child seat Forward facing child seat Forward facing child seat Note The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child Safety 21 BOOSTER SEATS WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a crash Use a belt positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 pounds 18 kilograms and 80 pounds 36 kilograms and upward to 100 pounds 45 kilograms if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight 8 a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when the child is seated without a booster seat e Can the child
179. ce and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume Your vehicle may not have all these settings Set Category for Seek Scan allows you to select the desired category such as Rock or Country and then use Seek or Scan to start your search for those channels Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels To use this feature you need your initial PIN which is 1234 Artist Title Team Alerts allows you to select Artists Titles and Teams that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on other channels Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts You can also set all alerts to on or off When an alert appears on the screen you can choose to Tune to the channel to Cancel the alert or to Disable Alerts If you are listening to a sporting event you can save your favorite teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel Note SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation Electronic Serial Number ESN is required when communicating with SIRIUS about your account 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 372 MyLincoln Touch When you select Direct Tune Enter the desired satellite channel number using the on screen keypad Browse View a list of all a
180. ce the battery is reconnected 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 271 CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade g to check for roughness Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm Press the lock tab to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 272 Maintenance Changing rear window wiper blade The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position This reduces the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash To replace the wiper blade 1 Grab the wiper arm with one hand close to the arm blade joint and pull it as far away from the glass as wy possible Do not use excessive forc
181. ces as well as access Account Manager please go to www LincolnAFS com REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this owner s manual Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications Collision Repairs We hope that you never experience a collision but accidents do happen Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit finish structural integrity corrosion protection and dent resistance During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts Warranty on Replacement Parts Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty Damage caused to your
182. cess the on screen numerical pad to enter a number and place a call During an active call you can also choose to e Mute the call e Put it on hold e Turn on privacy returns the call to your cellular phone e Join two calls e End the call Quick Dial Select and call contacts stored in your phonebook contacts and call history folder 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 387 When you select Phonebook Access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded phone book The system places the entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the screen To turn on contact picture settings if your device supports this feature press Phone gt Settings gt Manage Phonebook gt Download photos from Phonebook gt On Certain smart phones may support transferring street addresses when listed with phone book contact information If your phone supports this feature you can select and use these addresses as destinations and save them as favorites After you connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to SYNC you can access any previously dialed received or missed calls You can also choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial This is a phone dependent feature If your phone does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system Messaging Send text messages using your touchscreen See Text messaging la
183. ch recognition functions included in the system and address any errors 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 437 Navigation Features Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully Distraction Hazard Any navigation features may require manual non verbal setup Attempting to perform such set up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious consequences Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations Let Your Judgment Prevail Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices Route Safety Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
184. ching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph 24 km h e Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph 5 km h e Backing out of an angled parking spot False Alerts Note If the vehicle has a factory equipped tow bar and it is towing a trailer the sensors will detect the trailer and turn the BLIS off to avoid false alerts For non factory equipped tow bars you may want to turn the BLIS off manually There may be certain instances when either the BLIS or CTA systems illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone this is known as a false alert Some amount of false alerts are normal they are temporary and self correct 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Driving Aids 205 System Errors If either system senses a problem with the left or right sensor the BLIS indicator in the information display will illuminate and remain on Also BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT message will appear When problems that may cause the left or right indicator not to illuminate only the information display message faults appear Switching the Systems Off and On One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the information display control refer to the Information Display chapter When the BLISO is switched off the driver does not receive alerts and the information display shows BLIND SPOT SYS OFF and or CTA SYSTEM OFF The system switches back on whenever the ig
185. cle navigation positioning dispatch real time route guidance fleet management or similar applications or b with or in communication with including without limitation cellular phones palmtop and handheld computers pagers and personal digital assistants or PDAs WARNING This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time changing circumstances sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data any of which may lead to incorrect results 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 445 No Warranty This Data is provided to you as is and you agree to use it at your own risk NT and its licensors and their licensors and suppliers make no guarantees representations or warranties of any kind express or implied arising by law or otherwise including but not limited to content quality accuracy completeness effectiveness reliability fitness for a particular purpose usefulness use or results to be obtained from this Data or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free Disclaimer of Warranty NT AND ITS LICENSORS INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF QUALITY PERFORMANCE MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT Some States Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions so to that extent the above exclusion may not
186. commands in the Destination chart One shot Destination Street Address If your vehicle is equipped with the SD card navigation feature you have the ability to enter in a street address using a feature called one shot destination street address When you say either Navigation destination street address or Destination street address the system asks you to say the full address The system displays an example on screen You can then speak the address naturally such as One two three four Main Street Anytown 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 430 Appendices GENERAL INFORMATION SYNCO End User License Agreement EULA e You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation MS SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The MS SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic d
187. craft amp Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft amp Engine Shampoo e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations e Cover the battery power distribution box and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 284 Vehicle Care CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft amp Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U S or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after clean
188. d CTA also sounds a series of tones and a message appears in the information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left CTA works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own series of tones see the Parking Aids chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Driving Aids 203 System Sensors WARNING Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and alerting the driver the number of missed objects will increase To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLISO as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes BLIS is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist Note It is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present this is rare and known as a false blockage warning A false blocked condition either self corrects or clears after a key cycle The system uses radar sensors which are located behind the bumper fascia on each side of the vehicle Do not allow these areas to become obstructed by mud snow or bumper stickers as this can cause degraded system performance If the system detects a degraded performance condition BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE or CROSS TRAFFIC NOT AVAILABLE appear in the information display and the alert indicator illuminates in the appropriate mirror s The information display warning can be cleared but the alert indicator remains illuminated When the
189. d BLISO Blind Spot Information System with cross traffic alert lane departure warning forward collision warning system and satellite radio adult content restriction Optional Settings These settings can be configured right after a MyKey is first created or changed afterward with an admin key e Vehicle speed limit of 65 70 75 and 80 mph 105 113 121 and 130 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when vehicle speed has reached the selected top speed e Vehicle speed minder of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 64 MyKey e Audio system maximum volume of 45 A message in the audio system is displayed when attempting to exceed the limited volume Also the speed sensitive compensated volume feature will be disabled e Always on setting When this is selected you will not be able to disable AdvanceTrac 911 Assist or Do not disturb feature if your vehicle is equipped with these features CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display control to create a MyKey 1 Insert the key you want to program into the ignition or if the vehicle is equipped with push button start put the Intelligent Access key in the backup slot see the Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter for the backup slot location Turn the ignition on Access the
190. d have your brake system serviced immediately HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI LOCK BRAKES When the system is operating the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further Maintain pressure on the brake pedal You may also hear a noise from the system This is normal The anti lock braking system will not eliminate the dangers inherent when e you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you e your vehicle is hydroplaning e you take corners too fast e the road surface is poor PARKING BRAKE WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the transmission selector lever is securely latched in position P To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down to its fullest extent To release the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down again 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Traction Control 181 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction If your vehicle begins to slide the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and when needed reduces engine power at the same time If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction USING TRACTION CO
191. d ESP specialists at 800 367 3377 and do not forget to ask about our interest free payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time You re pre approved with no credit checks no hassles Or mail your name address city state and zip code to Ford ESP P O Box 8072 Royal Oak MI 48068 9933 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan 331 FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS CANADA ONLY You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan ESP Ford ESP is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Depending on the plan you purchase Ford ESP provides benefits such as e rental reimbursement e coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires e Roadside Assistance benefits There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs including reimbursement for towing and rental When you purchase Ford ESP you receive added peace of mind protection throughout Canada and the United States provided by a network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers The Lincoln Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers Note Repairs performed outside of Canada and the Un
192. d Printing USA fus Cruise Control 193 The information display will show a green indicator light f current gap setting and desired set speed 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal NE 5 A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if there is a vehicle detected in front of you Note When adaptive cruise control is active the set speed displayed in the information display may vary slightly from the speedometer Following a Vehicle WARNING When following a vehicle in front of you the vehicle will not decelerate automatically to a stop nor will the vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a collision without driver intervention Always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in a collision serious injury or death WARNING Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary Failing to do so may result in a collision serious injury or death Note The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane the vehicle speed will adjust automatically to maintain a preset gap distance The distance setting is adjustable The lead vehicle graphic will be illuminated The vehicle will maintain a constant dista
193. d by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors Distance and The further you travel from an FM station strength the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting CD and CD Player Information Note CD units play commercially pressed 4 75 inch 12 centimeter audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Note Do not insert CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Note Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 124 Audio System Always handle discs by
194. d existing traffic regulations Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver if you would be placed in an unsafe situation or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors changes in roads traffic conditions or driving conditions 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 393 Note When you connect the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle s current location travel direction and speed to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request Further to provide the services you request for continuous improvement the service may collect and record call details and voice communications For more information see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www SYNCMyRide com If you do not want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions do not subscribe or use the service SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors integrated GPS technology and comprehensive map and traffic data to give you personalized traffic reports precise turn by turn directions business search news sports weather and more For a complete list of services or to learn more please visit www SYNCMyRide com Connecting to SYNC Services Using
195. d noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly do not e exceed 70 mph 113 km h e use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time e use commercial car washing equipment e use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire and wheel 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 315 The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All wheel driving capability if applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly additional caution should be given to e towing a trailer e driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire and wheel and seek service as soon as possible Tire Change Procedure WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from m
196. d provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Keys and Remote Control 61 The remote start system will not work if e the ignition is on e the alarm system is triggered e you disable the feature the hood is not closed the transmission is not in P the vehicle battery voltage is too low the service engine soon light is on Remote Starting the Vehicle Note You must press each button within three seconds of each other Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not chirp if you do not follow this sequence The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure To remote start your vehicle 1 Press the lock button to lock all the doors 2 Press the remote start button twice The exterior lamps will flash twice The horn will chirp if the system fails to start unless quiet start is on Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise You can switch it on or off in the information display See the Information Displays chapter Note If you remote start your vehicle you must have a programmed intelligent access key inside your vehicle and press the START STOP button on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus
197. d status 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 122 Information Displays Passenger Sensing Action Description System Message Remove Objects Near Displayed when objects are by the passenger Passenger Seat seat After the objects are moved away from the seat if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Reminder Messages Action Description Steering Lock Turn Displays when you need to turn the steering Wheel to Unlock wheel in order to disengage the steering lock Shift to Park Displayed when the engine is turned off and shift select lever is in any position other than P Park Tire Messages vehicle have low tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Displays when the tire pressure monitoring Fault system is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is Fault malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Wheels and tires chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Audio System 123 GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors AM and FM frequencies are establishe
198. d weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 18 Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children age restraint type children Children weighing 40 Ib 18 kg or less generally age four or younger Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 Ib 36 kg and upward to 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt positioning booster seat generally children who are at least 4 ft 9 in 1 45 m tall or greater than 80 Ib 36 kg or 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by child restraint manufacturer Use a child safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Use a belt positioning booster seat Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest and seat back upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 i
199. d wheels are designed to give your vehicle a sport appearance With low profile tires you may notice an increase in road noise and faster tire wear depending on road conditions and driving styles Due to their design low profile tires and wheels are more prone to road damage from potholes rough or unpaved roads car wash rails and curb contact than standard tires and wheels Notice to Crossover Vehicle Owners Crossover vehicles handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Crossover vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers Drive at safe speeds for the conditions Keep tires properly inflated Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e e e e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 291 WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts Children and infants must use appropriate restr
200. des are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 293 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAAB C Note The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristic
201. dicates the ending point of a planned route Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on the planned route No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals are available for accurate map positioning This icon may display under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access e v r ulL 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 427 Quick touch Buttons When in map mode touch anywhere on the map display to access the following options When you select Set as Dest Select a scrolled location on the map as your destination You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on the map display When you reach the desired location simply let go and then touch Set as Dest Set as Waypoint Set the current location as a waypoint Save to Favorites Save the current location to your favorites POI Icons On Off Select icons to display on the map You can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same time View Edit Route Access these features when a route is active e View route e Edit destination waypoints e Edit turn list e Detour e Edit route preferences e Edit traffic preferences e Cancel route Rotate the map view by swiping pepe your finger across the shaded bar r PR 5 with the arrows 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 428 MyLincoln Touch Navteq is the digital map provider for the n
202. ding on the headliner or roof pillar trim e a flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment SR crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness PAN indicator See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in this chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 54 Supplementary Restraints System Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of your vehicle Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module which deploys activates
203. do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 kilometers after any wheel disturbance such as rotation flat tire wheel removal Lug nut socket size Bolt size rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting surface prior to installation Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 320 Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine 3 7LV6engine Cubic inches Required fuel Ignition system Coil on plug Compression ratio 10 5 1 Spark plug gap 0 049 0 053 inch 1 25 1 35 mm Engine drivebelt routing 1 Short drivebelt is on first pulley O groove closest to engine 2 Long drivebelt is on second pulley PB groove farthest from engine NS O 4 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 321 Capacities and Specifications JIEN uoneognen qv UNA V GPGOZIN SSM epeuen GTSAT 0ZMS OXD e epeueo TASTOZMS OXD SM SAO 0ZMS OXe SM ISO OZMS OXe q 660 TW dS I quoeppAmbo JO GTX JO y DX Vds TW dsa 97IX TV S9D9IN SSM 10 V CIDIMESSM O
204. do the following 1 Access the main menu and select Settings then MyKey 2 Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button 3 Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS The information display controls provide information about keys programmed to the vehicle e MYKEY MILES Tracks mileage when a MyKey is used If mileage does not accumulate as expected then the MyKey is not being used by the intended user The only way to reset this to zero is by clearing MyKeys If the mileage is lower than the last time you checked then the key system has been recently reset e MYKEY S Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Can also be used to detect deletion of a MyKey e ADMIN KEY S Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the vehicle Can also be used to detect if an additional key has been programmed to the vehicle USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is NOT compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a non Ford approved remote start system The actions provided below do NOT make MyKey compatible with non Ford approved remote start system but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey functions Vehicles Equipped with Traditional Keys When using a
205. dos 399 Lights warning and indicator 102 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 454 Index O R Octane TaliOg enoncononccninnoionianazasos RAdIO sensitiva 125 AM FM erario 363 P Single CD 125 u Radio reception 123 iiis iner MODES peces idi Radio voice commands 369 eka ead E NP MADE Rear heated seats 142 Pairing your phone for the frst Dec sssr Rear view camera y display 5 2 teen 186 405 Parental MyKey programming 63 Rear window defroster 127 Parking brake o Parts Receiving a text message 389 see Motorcraft parts Recommendations for Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor Phone settings 390 410 Phone voice commands POI categories aurreri Point of Interest POI Power distribution box see FUSES cronica Power door locks Power ladera Power mirrors eene Powerpoint ssessssss Power steering sss fluid checking and adding fluid refill capacity fluid specifications Power Windows sss Privacy information 354 Push button start system Q Quick touch buttons 427 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf
206. e ES SETTINGS Press to select any of the following Clock Display Sound Vehicle Settings Help INFORMATION Press to select any of the following SYNCO Services SIRIUS Travel Link Alerts Calendar e SYNC Apps If the icon is yellow see Alerts in the Information section of this chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 350 MyLincoln Touch PHONE Press to select any of the following Making and Receiving Calls Quick Dial Phonebook Call History Text Messaging Settings NAVIGATION Press to select any of the following My Home Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest Emergency Street Address Intersection City Center Map Previous Starting Point Latitude Longitude Freeway Entrance Exit ENTERTAINMENT Press to select any of the following AM FM SIRIUS CD USB BT Stereo SD Card A V In CLIMATE Press to select any of the following Driver Settings Recirculated Air Auto Dual Passenger Settings A C Defrost 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 351 C Press to access your home screen Depending on your vehicle s option package and software your screens may vary in appearance from the descriptions in this section Your features may also be limited depending on your market Check with your authorized dealer for availability Using the Touch sensitive Controls on Your System
207. e because it can break the wiper arm at the heel Hold it there until the next step a 2 Grab the primary structure of the blade with the other hand close to the arm blade joint 3 Grip tightly and press on the arm blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm 4 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard gt If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer AIR FILTER CHECK WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed See Motorcraft amp Part Numbers in the Capacities and Specifications chapter See Scheduled Maintenance Information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 273 Changing the air filter element 1 Release the clamp
208. e or a second double press of the transmitter button The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P A chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to power close A single chime indicates a problem with the close request caused by e the ignition is on and the transmission is not in P e or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage e or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request a fast continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut failure See your authorized dealer if you still have a fast chime after the load is removed To open or close from the instrument panel Press the c instrument panel button 5 EB To open or close with the remote control Press the remote X control button twice within three seconds To open with the outside liftgate control button 1 Unlock the liftgate with the remote control or power door unlock control If the intelligent access transmitter if equipped is within 3 feet 1 meter of the liftgate the liftgate will unlock when you press the liftgate release button 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Locks 75 2 Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Note Allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
209. e AWD system has adequately cooled the AWD Off message will turn off and normal AWD function will return The AWD Off message will turn off when the system cools and normal AWD function returns If your vehicle is equipped with AWD a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used If the mini spare tire is installed the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components This condition may be indicated by an AWD Off message in the information display If there is an AWD Off message in the message center from using the spare tire this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive or damage the AWD system 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus All Wheel Drive If Equipped 173 Driving In Special Conditions With All Wheel Drive AWD AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use a low gear when possible Lower
210. e Data you must contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America LLC NT within thirty 30 days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price To contact NT please visit www navteq com The Data is provided for your personal internal use only and may not be resold It is protected by copyright and is subject to the following terms this End User License Agreement and conditions which are agreed to by you on the one hand and NAVTEQ North America LLC NT and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers on the other hand The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities including 9 Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada 9 Queen s Printer for Ontario 9 Canada Post Corporation GeoBase NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service to publish and sell ZIP 4 information 9 United States Postal Service amp 2009 Prices are not established controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS United States Postal Service USPS and ZIP 4 The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de Estad stica y Geograf a 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 444 Appendices TERMS AND CONDITIONS License Limitations on Use You agree that your license to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for sol
211. e Inflating Your Tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light turns off Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section TPMS If the tires are properly inflated malfunction and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 312 Wheels and Tires Low tire Possible cause Customer action required pressure warning light Flashing Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel warning light and tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function For a description on how the system functions see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section TPMS If the tires are properly inflated malfunction and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When Inflating Your Tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately t
212. e able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Note Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK Note Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is warmed up approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached to allow the fluid to cool before checking Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slip
213. e desired HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapid flashing indicates successful training 4 Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for 5 seconds then release You may need to do this twice to activate the door If your garage door does not operate watch the HomeLink indicator light If the indicator light stays on the programming is complete Press and release the programmed HomeLink button and then begin programming your garage door opener See below for Steps 5 7 If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light the HomeLink button is not programmed yet Do the following Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the hand held transmitter button every 2 seconds The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink function button recognizes and accepts the hand held transmitter s radio frequency signal 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Universal Garage Door Opener 145 After programming the HomeLink button follow Steps 5 7 as listed below to program your garage door opener T Note You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener
214. e engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be restarted Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When Fail Safe Mode is Activated WARNING Fail safe mode is for use during emergencies only Operate the vehicle in fail safe mode only as long as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs When in fail safe mode the vehicle will have limited power will not be able to maintain high speed operation and may completely shut down without warning potentially losing engine power power steering assist and power brake assist which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 265 You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not b
215. e from Apple When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 379 Playing Music from Your Device Insert your device and select the USB or SD Card tab once the system recognizes it You can then select from the following options When you select Repeat the currently playing song or album random order playing track artist name album and genre Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume Your vehicle may not have all these settings Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings which is under Media Player See Settings Device Information displays software and firmware information about the currently connected media device Update Media Index indexes your device each time you connect it to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all media on the device Browse Browse the contents of the device It also allows you to search by genre artist album etc If you want to view song information such as Title Artist File Folder Album and Genre touch the on screen album art You can also press What s Playing to hear how the system pronounces the current band and song This can be helpful when using voice commands to make
216. e fuels with a posted octane rating below 87 Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuel and Refueling 159 RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components If you have run out of fuel You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting crank time will take a few seconds longer than normal With keyless ignition just start the engine Crank time will be longer than usual Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8 liters of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 3 8 liters may be required The service engine soon indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator see to Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter Refilling with a Portable Fuel Container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the capless fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling
217. e gf 3rd Printing USA fus 10 Introduction SYMBOL GLOSSARY WARNING You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle E Symbol Symbol UN alert See Owner s Anti lock system lo gt system Cabin air filter a Check fuel cap and Unlock Wa SN Child seat Cruise control Do not open E anchor when hot Engine air i Engine filter coolant temperature Fan warning E pump Fuse reset compartment Introduction 11 Heated rear window Lighting control Panic alarm Power steering fluid Service engine soon Windshield defrost and demist Symbol luggage compartment Maintain correct fluid release level Parking brake system Low tire pressure warning Parking aid system Power window lockout Stability control Power windows front and rear Side airbag Windshield washer and wiper Symbol a DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and
218. e gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 441 NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE SOME STATES AND OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 6 Arbitration and Governing Law You agree that any dispute claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara California The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California without giving
219. e or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 309 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tir
220. e replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Load Carrying 219 Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your v
221. e using the power door lock control all doors will lock then unlock if e the ignition is on or e the ignition is off and the transmission is not in P Autolock Feature If Enabled The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is on e you shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion and e your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e you open then close any door while the ignition is on and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e your vehicle then reaches a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 72 Locks Autounlock Feature If Enabled The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is on all the doors are closed and your vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e your vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is switched off Or to accessory and e the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being switched off or to accessory Note The doors will not autounlock if you electronically lock the vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door Deactivating or Activating Note You can activate or deactivate the autolock and autounlock features independently of each other You can activate or deactivate these features e through an author
222. e your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 304 Wheels and Tires Tire Replacement Requirements WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safet
223. eadings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement As used in this Agreement the words include and including and variations thereof will not be deemed to be terms of limitation but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words without limitation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 443 9 Other Vendors Terms and Conditions The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users This Agreement includes end user terms applicable to these compamies included at the end of this Agreement and thus your use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions which are applicable to TeleNav s third party vendor licensors NavTeq End User License Agreement END USER TERMS The content provided Data is licensed not sold By opening this package or installing copying or otherwise using the Data you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement you are not permitted to install copy use resell or transfer the Data If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement and have not installed copied or used th
224. eadlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other For Vehicles with Halogen Headlamps On the wall or screen you will Observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the right hand portion of the beam pattern If the top edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line the headlamp will need to be adjusted 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 275 For Vehicles with HID Headlamps There is a distinct cut off change from light to dark in the left portion of the beam pattern The top edge of this cut off should be positioned 2 inches 5 centimeters below the horizontal reference line 4 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Hex head driver turn the adjuster either clockwise or counterclockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 5 Close the hood and turn off the lamps HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE CHANGING A BULB Lamp Assembly Condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a
225. ealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford International Business Development Inc Customer Relationship Center P O Box 11957 Caparra Heights Station San Juan Puerto Rico 00922 1937 Telephone 800 841 FORD 3673 FAX 813 390 0804 Email prcac ford com www ford com pr If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact Ford Middle East Customer Relationship Center P O Box 21470 Dubai United Arab Emirates Telephone 971 4 3326084 Toll Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 800 8971409 Local Telephone Number for Kuwait 24810575 FAX 971 4 3327299 Email menacac ford com www me ford com 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 246 Customer Assistance If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations amp Global Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm
226. ecause you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus All Wheel Drive If Equipped 177 Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on Snow and Ice A N WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you s
227. ect disconnect set as favorite delete and add device Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG Prioritize Choose your connection methods and change Connection Methods them as needed You can select to Change Order and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi Fi The Wi Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a bf Cri certification mark of the Wi Fi Alliance CERTIFIED 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 413 Help Press the Settings icon gt Help then select from the following Where Am I View your vehicle s current location if your vehicle is equipped with navigation If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation nothing displays System Information number ESN version applications installed on your system vehicle is moving 911 Assist Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and services section In Case of Emergency ICE Speed Dial allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there is an emergency Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons The ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process Voice Command List View categorized lists of voice commands 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3
228. ected by the reverse sensing system The system uses red yellow and green highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing system The alert highlights the closest object detected The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled highlighted areas are still displayed Refer to Adjusting the Rear View Camera Settings above on how to enable or disable the visual park alert feature 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Parking Aids 189 Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on the full area behind the vehicle is not shown Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature Note Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note When manual zoom is enabled only the centerline is shown Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R Reverse When the transmission is shifted out of R Reverse the feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again Selectable settings for this feature are OFF Level 1 Level 2 or Level 3 Press the up and down arrows to change the view The selection level appears between the buttons i e Level 1 The default setting for the manual zoom is OFF Rear Camera Delay When shifting
229. ed service is required or the assembly has been submerged in water During long periods of trailer towing with outside temperatures above 70 F 21 C and at wide open throttle for long periods above 45 mph 72 km h non synthetic rear axle fluids should be changed every 3000 miles 4800 kilometers or three months whichever comes first This interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number F1TZ 19580 B or equivalent Add friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles see Technical specifications in the Capacities and Specifications chapter for details Police Taxi Livery vehicle axle maintenance Change rear axle fluid every 100000 miles 160000 kilometers Rear axle fluid change may be waived if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL M2C192 A part number FITZ 19580 B or equivalent Add four ounces 118 mL of additive friction modifier XL 3 EST M2C118 A or equivalent for complete refill of Traction Lok rear axles The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been submerged in water California fuel filter replacement If the vehicle is registered in California the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the ve
230. ed at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving The transmission fluid level should be targeted within the cross hatch area if at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C If the fluid level is above the MAX range of the dipstick remove fluid to reach the hashmark level Note Fluid level above the MAX level may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off until normal operating temperatures are reached Depending on vehicle use cooling times could take up to 30 minutes or longer 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 267 Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Technical specifications section in this chapter Note Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage C MIN SER MAX D If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct DESS If an ove
231. eel Drive If Equipped USING YOUR ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicles cannot The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Note When an AWD system fault is present the warning Check AWD will display in the message center The AWD system is not functioning correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive When this warning is displayed have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer Note The AWD Off message may also be displayed in the message center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front wheel drive This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip such as deep sand To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes After the engine has been restarted and th
232. eel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 or visit www camvap ca GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you can
233. efrost Auto Off Remote Start when the vehicle Auto Off is started using Auto Off the remote start feature Passenger Seat Auto Off 5 10 15 minutes On Off Enable Disable On Off On Off Wipers On Off On Off 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Information Displays 113 Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set Gauge Display Fuel Gauge Fuel Tach Standard Enhanced English Espa ol Francais Miles amp Gal Km amp Liters Fahrenheit F Celsius C Restore Defaults Hold OK to Restore Settings to Factory Defaults Information In this mode you can view different vehicle system information and perform a system check XX Warnings Displays the number of warnings that need immediate attention in amber You can only view the warnings form the System Check menu View them immediately by pressing OK and then OK again to enter system check Use the up down arrows to scroll through the warnings 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 114 Information Displays MyKey Admin Keys Number of admin keys MyKeys Number of MyKeys programmed MyKey Miles km Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey System Check All active warnings will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Use the up down arrow buttons to scroll throug
234. ehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 Ib 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 Ib 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 220 Load Carrying e Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 Ib 635 kg cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 2
235. ehicle is equipped with Navigation SYNC Services downloads your requested destination to the navigation system The navigation system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions See the Navigation system section for more information 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 395 Disconnecting from SYNC Services 1 Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel 2 Say Goodbye from the SYNC Services main menu Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information You can save address points such as work or home You can also save favorite information like sports teams such as Detroit Lions or a news category You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www SYNCMyRide com Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC TDI Services to interrupt voice prompt or an audio clip such as a sports report and say your voice command Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth enabled cellular phone number not your VIN Vehicle Identification Number You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with Traffic Directions and Information and continue enjoying your personalized services 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 396 MyLincoln Touch SYNC Services Voice Commands EB When a route has been
236. ely 154 cities 132 in the U S 13 in Canada and 9 in Mexico cityseekr when available is a service that provides more information about certain a points of interest such as restaurants hotels and attractions H k When you have selected a point of C tys e e r interest the location and information appear such as address and phone number If cityseekr lists the point of interest more information is available such as a brief description hotel check in and checkout times or restaurant hours Press More Information for a longer review a list of services and facilities the average room or meal price as well as the website link 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 421 This screen displays point of interest icons such as Hotel om 995 Coffeehouse gt LT Food amp Drink Nightlife wr Attraction This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple categories within the system 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 422 MyLincoln Touch When you are viewing more information for hotels cityseekr also tells you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons Hotel Services and Facilities x e Restaurant 24 Hr Room Service amp ih Business Center Fitness Center a e Handicap Facilities Internet Access gt Laundry t Refrigerator For restaurants cityseekr can provide information such
237. ely personal noncommercial purposes and not for service bureau timesharing or other similar purposes Except as otherwise set forth herein you agree not to otherwise reproduce copy modify decompile disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data and may not transfer or distribute it in any form for any purpose except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws License Limitations on Transfer Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of the Data except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if a you retain no copies of the Data b the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement and c you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media e g the CD ROM or DVD you purchased all original packaging all Manuals and other documentation Specifically Multi disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof Additional License Limitations Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement and without limiting the preceding paragraph your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement and you may not a use this Data with any products systems or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehi
238. em become experts on the operation of your vehicle Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Replacement Parts Dealerships stock Ford Motorcraft and Ford authorized branded remanufactured replacement parts These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company s specifications Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 12 month 12000 mile 20000 kilometer parts and labor limited warranty If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet Ford specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions compliance Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle from general maintenance to collision repairs Note Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops Please contact your dealer for details 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance 333 Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved reliability durability and resale value To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems it is imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated intervals Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor IOLM
239. em mm DID nm BATTERY Pepaj ports State al Health Carditinnd Tox fj v div aala bos E capped D ix Tr dei rs ran orn U TELT Bi Dre THEE uad US d Factory spec cil crab caps OO OOO 0 0 A set cn aks serie amans E imi cong sten in itc ts nt cage PE WEARDEN Y O aprum cim mood L menseres cet ee E OE te vos wpn gr 1E tee west painta rre OO mores st taco roce ra TES nion xo tc vara 3 Dmm Service Advisor Customer Signature Technician 1200000000 SN BOR wee cmm Fart Uc Cp A igt aanas Customer Copy i dies 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance 337 NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG Intelligent Oil Life Monitor amp Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor amp that determines when the engine oil needs to be changed based on how your vehicle is used By using several important factors in its calculations the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce environmental waste at the same time This means you won t have to remember to change the oil on a mileage based schedule the vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the information display The following table is intended to provide ex
240. en unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled e This will enable the feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled One time Belt Minder amp Disable If at any time the driver or front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position the system is disabled for the current ignition cycle The feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for about 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seat back if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a crash Read the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
241. en if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 301 Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kP
242. ency Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes Brake Over Accelerator If the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and reduce engine power If you experience this condition apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop Turn the engine off shift to position P and apply the parking brake then inspect the accelerator pedal for any interferences If none are found and the condition persists have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer Brake Assist Brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal Brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 180 Brakes Anti Lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking The anti lock brake system lamp momentarily illuminates when 5 the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the anti lock brake system may be disabled and may need to be serviced OLO If the anti lock brake system is disabled normal braking is still ae cffective If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake release
243. enly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Front wheel drive All wheel drive E E 3 vehicles front tires at left of Re diagram e ED uN Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure Note The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and cable chains e f possible avoid fully loading your vehicle e Use only SAE Class S cables or equivalent e Use SAE Class S cables only on the front axle on vehicles equipped with P245 60R18 tires e Do not use tire cables or optional traction devices with P245 50R20 or P265 40R22 tires 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 308 W
244. enter in the instrument cluster See Information displays Press repeatedly or press and hold until the desired level is reached Note In the uplevel message center only a message will pop up that will show incrementally where the dimmer is in relation to the dimming steps These steps will also vary for daytime and night time dimming Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer will set the illuminated components to the maximum setting automatically HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY You can set the delay time to keep the headlamps on for up to three minutes after the ignition is turned off Follow the steps below to change the delay time Steps 1 through 6 must be done within 10 seconds 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position 3 Turn the lighting control to the off position 4 Turn the ignition on 5 Turn the ignition off 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Lighting 91 6 Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position The headlamps and parking lamps will turn on 7 Turn the lighting control to the off position when the desired delay time has been reached The headlamps and parking lamps will turn off You can set the headlamp exit delay to one of the following settings e Off e 10 seconds e 20 seconds e 30 seconds e 60 seconds e 90 seconds e 120 seconds e 180 seconds Note You can als
245. er Feature WARNING While the system allows you to deactivate it this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate or activate the system while driving the vehicle Note The driver and front passenger warning are deactivated and activated independently When deactivating or activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e the parking brake is set e the transmission selector lever is in position P e the ignition is off e the driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled 1 Turn the ignition on DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off about 1 2 minutes e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state e After Step 3 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Safety Belts 41 4 Within about seven seconds of the light turning off buckle th
246. er all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it is very important that they continue to sit properly Properly seated occupants sit upright lean against the seat back and center themselves on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased Children and Airbags WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back gt Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics tlh suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash N 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 47 FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death WARNING Sitting improperly out of positio
247. er information or to replace the filter see an authorized dealer REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED The climate control system adjusts the cabin temperature during remote start You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings You can now make adjustments You will need to turn certain vehicle dependent features back on such as e heated seats e cooled seats e heated steering wheel e heated mirrors e heated rear window You can adjust the settings using the information display controls See the nformation Displays chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Climate Control 131 Automatic Climate Systems Automatic Settings You can set the climate control to operate in AUTO mode through the information display setting Remote Start gt Climate Control gt Heater A C gt Auto The climate control system automatically sets the interior temperature to 72 F 22 C In hot weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C Cooled seats are set to high if available and selected to AUTO in the information display In moderate weather the system either heats or cools based on previous settings The rear defroster heated mirrors and heated cooled seats are not automatically turned on In cold weather the system is set to 72 F 22 C The heated seats and heated steering wheel are set to high if avai
248. er pressing the voice icon wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system e Speak naturally without long pauses between words e At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 358 MyLincoln Touch Accessing a List of Available Commands e If you use the touchscreen press the Settings icon gt Help gt Voice Command List e If you use the steering wheel control press the voice icon After the tone speak your command clearly Voice Settings Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction help and feedback The system defaults to standard interaction that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest level of guidance and feedback Interaction Mode Novice mode provides detailed interaction and guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts Confirmation Prompts The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice request If turned off the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested The system may still occasionally ask you to confirm settings 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 359 Phone Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are lists of possible results fro
249. er strap over the back of the seat For outboard seating positions route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts For the center seating positions route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint If needed the head restraints can also be removed 2 Locate the correct anchor behind the gap cover for the selected seating position 3 Pull the gap cover reward to expose the anchors Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child Safety 31 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends lts use CHILD SAFETY LOCKS The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e Insert the key and turn to the lock position key horizontal to engage the childproof locks e Insert the key and turn to the unlock position key vertical to disengage the childproof locks 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 32 Safety Belts PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the
250. ers in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software a observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely b use your own personal judgment while driving If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver places you in an unsafe situation or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe do not follow such instructions c do not input destinations or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software unless your vehicle is stationary and parked d do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal unauthorized unintended unsafe hazardous or unlawful purposes or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement e arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device such as an airbag You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above 2 Account Information You agree a when registering the TeleNav Software to provide TeleNav with true accurate current and complete information about yourself and
251. ertification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle L Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 298 Wheels and Tires e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel M Maximum Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be fou
252. es If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire Rotation Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 307 Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information will help your tires wear more ev
253. es or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 310 Wheels and Tires Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Note Each road tire is equipped r with a tire pressure sensor located inside the tire and wheel assembly cavity The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer Check the tire pressure periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your
254. ess the voice button and after the tone say CD then any of the commands in the following chart Repeat off Repeat track Play next track Shuffle Shuffle off This applies to WMA or MP3 files only SD Card Slot and USB Port SD Card Slot Note Your SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card press the card in and the system ejects it Do not attempt to pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage Note The navigation system also uses this card slot See Navigation system later in this chapter for more information The slot is located either in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music OOO 9 from your SD card slot press the lower left corner of the touchscreen 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 378 MyLincoln Touch SD logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC EP ui y The ports are located either in the center E USB Port console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel To access and play music from your device press the lower left corner of the touchscreen OOO This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks flash drives or thumb drives and charge devices if they support this feature In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you must have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable available for purchas
255. eturn to the previous airflow selection When on defrost e Provides outside air to reduce window fogging e Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents K Manual controls Select any of the following airflow distribution modes e Floor and Defrost Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents and provides outside air to reduce window fogging e Panel Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e Panel and Floor Distributes air through the instrument panel vents demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents e Floor Distributes air through the demister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents L Driver settings Depending on your vehicle and option package you may have the following features e Touch or to adjust the temperature e f your vehicle is equipped with heated seats touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat See the Seats chapter e If your vehicle is equipped with cooled seats touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat See the Seats chapter e Touch and hold MyTemp to select a temperature you would like your vehicle to remember and maintain for you Climate Control Voice Commands EB The following voice commands are available at the main menu i amp level of a voice session For example press the voice button and after the prompt Say a command say any of t
256. ety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso If the safety belt is too short when fully extended you can obtain a safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 38 Safety Belts SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To adjust the shoulder belt height 1 Pull on the center button and slide the height adjuster up or down 2 Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place SAFETY BEL
257. evelop and impact the current route no notification is provided Manual Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification for traffic incidents along the planned route You have a choice to accept or ignore the notification before making the route deviation Turn on certain or all traffic icons on the map such as road work incident accidents and closed roads Avoid Areas Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when calculating a route for you Press Add to select a category Once you select the system tries to avoid the area s if possible for all routes To delete a selection choose the listing on the screen When the screen changes to Avoid Areas Edit you can press Delete at the bottom right of the screen Map Mode Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view map mode Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks when available 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings visible land use and land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe These maps also contain features such as town blocks building footprints and railways 3D landmarks appear as clear visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourist value The 3D landmarks appear in 3D map mode only Coverage varies and improves with updated map releases 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf
258. ext messages Reply to text messages 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 392 MyLincoln Touch INFORMATION Under the Information menu you can access features such as SYNCO Services SIRIUS Travel Link Alerts Calendar e SYNC Applications If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation press the i Information button to access these features If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation press the corner of the touchscreen with the green tab SYNC Services If Equipped U S Only Note SYNC Services requires activation before use Visit www SYNCMyRide com to register and check your eligibility for complimentary services Standard phone and message rates may apply Subscription may be required You must also have the active SYNC Services Bluetooth enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the system in order to connect to and use SYNC Services See Phone earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions Note This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller ID blocking on your mobile phone Make sure your mobile phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services Note The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions Any navigation features are provided only as an aid Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions an
259. ey driver depending on the settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle Note For all vehicles the number of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey system status menu may include the non Ford approved remote start system as an additional key in the total count See the Checking System Status section For all vehicles with a non Ford approved remote start installed it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys in which case you will need to use your remote start system to clear all MyKeys which removes all restrictions and returns them to admin key status by doing the following 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using your non Ford approved remote start fob 3 Follow Steps 1 3 in the Clearing all MyKeys section 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyKey 67 MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Potential Causes I cannot program a e The key in the ignition does not have admin key privileges e The key in the ignition is the only admin key there always has to be at least one admin key e The intelligent access key is not in the backup slot vehicles with push button start e SecuriLock passive anti theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode e The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges See the Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems chapter I cannot program the e The
260. eys e An unknown key has been programmed to programmed total the vehicle as an admin key includes one additional e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start key system See the Using MyKey with remote start systems chapter MyKey miles do not e The restricted key is not being used by the accumulate intended user e The key system has been reset 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Locks 69 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock the vehicle Power Door Locks The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger door panels A Unlock A a B Lock B Remote Control You can use the remote control anytime the vehicle is not running Unlocking the Doors Two Stage Unlock n Press the button to unlock the driver doors Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors The turn signals will flash Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two stage unlocking Disabling two stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of the button The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking mode was changed The unlocking mode will be applied to the remote control keyless entry keypad and intelligent access Intelligent access at the driver door will unlock all doors when two stage unlocking is disabled Locking
261. f 3rd Printing USA fus Fuel and Refueling 165 If the service engine soon indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M Testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance 1 M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced See On board Diagnostics OBD II in this chapter Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the
262. fads Sa CROSS Traffic Alert 200 Cruise control suss 190 Cargo management system 211 C 210 Customer Assistance 234 argo A Ford Extended Service A E 125 Plana lona 329 331 CD player isset pee 123 376 Getting roadside assistance 234 Getting the service you CD voice commands 377 Heed sonnia eran e 240 Cell phone use sss 15 Ordering additional owner s literature ala 246 Changing a tire 313 Utilizing the Child safety restraints 27 29 Mediation Arbitration Child safety seats attaching with tether straps 29 automatic locking mode TeLraCbDOE soriana 36 LATCH cadrete 27 Child safety seats booster seats ssssesss 22 Cleaning the touchscreen 352 Cleaning your vehicle 281 engine compartment 283 instrument panel 285 INTETIOT teen detis 284 plastic Darts 2 ens 282 WASHING erica 281 WOKING ER 283 WIEEIS ertt E eee tod 286 wiper blades 284 Climate voice commands 416 CloGK 5 asa iron Gd er 125 403 Collision Warning System 205 Console innreise es 150 Overhead uices entres testes 150 Coolant iuste ies 261 checking and adding 261 refill capacities 321 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Propra intacto 244 D Defrost venia 127
263. ff to protect overheating of the engine Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and Water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 176 Al
264. fill if necessary Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks chips or pits Half shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation 3 H n Brake coolant recovery reservoir automatic transmission with an underhood dipstick and window washer Tf your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister Replace as needed Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi point vehicle inspection It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle It is your checklist that gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle You will know what has been checked what is okay as well as those things that may require future or immediate attention The multi point vehicle inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 336 Scheduled Maintenance ma BETINE Cire neca O NL NT Em Multi Polnt Inspection Report Card as Recommended by Ford Motor Company Teka Slo hoci lane ine Fog Wain Elbi Mis Tell thle Ton A tor Timisoa Thin ix amiy a pam Gat sf uisa matara hena wst dm WOT ri a Menus CK uat wa gonssesonioLcon Ir setie reia FLUID LEVELS ANC PILL 5 O CE A sinat es OOs Dee DT OOs nm DU p
265. filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within the fuel filler housing and to the ground If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear on the instrument cluster At the next opportunity do the following 1 Safely pull off the road 2 Turn off the engine 3 Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening 4 Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the message may not reset immediately It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn Off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 162 Fuel and Refueling FUEL CONSUMPTION Filling the Tank The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty Note The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to
266. g USA fus MyLincoln Touch 409 Navigation Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Navigation then select from the following Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off bottom or bottom to top fastest route or ecological route Have the system use high occupancy vehicle lanes Navigation State Province information roadwork occurs driving conditions may occur and ice on the road may occur reduced visibility announcements Avoid Areas Enter specific areas that you would like to i ERRAT avoid on planned navigation routes 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 410 MyLincoln Touch Phone Settings Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Phone then select from the following Bluetooth Devices Comnect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on and off Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle With this feature turned on text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle 911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications and services section Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls ring tone beep text to speech or have it be silent Text Message Select the type of notification for text Notification messages alert tone beep text to speech or have it be
267. g voice commands This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you The system provides feedback through audible tones prompts questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction voice settings The system also asks short questions confirmation prompts when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request When using voice commands words and icons may appear in the lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session such as Listening Success Failed Paused or Try Again 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 357 How to Use Voice Commands with Your System Press the voice icon After the tone speak your command i clearly What Can I Say To access the available voice commands for the current session do one of the following e During a voice session press the Help icon in the lower left status bar of the screen e Say What can I say for an on screen listing of the possible voice commands associated with your current voice session e Press the voice icon After the tone say Help to hear a list of possible voice commands Helpful Hints e Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands e Aft
268. gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles in special conditions e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement e f your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e t may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e t often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 174 All Wheel Drive If Equipped If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck WARNING Always set the parking brake ful
269. gher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For full size and dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequent
270. gine 151 Starting the engine 224i pug ue end xc ai nR eEA 154 Engine block heater tocara ra eme REX X eU EX du 155 Fuel and Refueling 157 A A ore e eR nice diate QUE dete ps Oe ve 158 Running out of fuel 2 159 Refueling sca 8 near aa enaa S REN ee dee e y S 160 Fuelconsumption s sa siio eandem a eaaa e a aaa e E a a ae 162 Transmission 166 Automatic transmissions reses s wea a a 166 Hill Start assist oraa eine esha a Rm RR mm n Rom da 170 All Wheel Drive If Equipped 172 All Wheel drive scsi kA ee hd OOS SEER E REE RENTA 172 Brakes 179 E hee Bee Roe ee 179 Hints on driving with anti lock brakes o o o o o ooo o 180 Parking Drake cui eke Mana ERG BES Ree GRE CE Re DA 180 Traction Control 181 Traction Control a ieu es Ru el EUR aha A eee 181 Stability Control 182 AdvancelraeQ sss teica Oka eRe a eRe he R ERAS Ee Rea OS 183 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Table of Contents Parking Aids Sensing System css dd tod dba hea paa a hae Rear view camera system o o ooo ee Cruise Control Using cruise control o Using Adaptive Cruise ConmtrOl o o o o ooooooo ooo Driving Aids Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert CTA aisre ace x eph dad eR Collision warning system l l STEENS ice ed pup RE CREE ed GRE ad am s Load Carrying Cargo Medieval ks hec eX ia Roof racks and load carriers o o oo ooooo coco
271. gnals from the sensor have been obstructed The sensors are located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille When the sensors are obstructed a vehicle ahead cannot be detected and the collision warning system does not function The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message being displayed The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display Heavy rain spray snow or fog is interfering with the radar signals Swirling water or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction Wait a short time It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed The collision warning system is temporarily disabled Collision warning should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve The collision warning system is temporarily disabled Collision warning should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve 208 Driving Aids System Limitations WARNING The collision warning system s brake support can only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the driver applies the vehicle s brakes
272. h any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 446 Appendices Entire Agreement These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NT and its licensors including their licensors and suppliers and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter Severability You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect Governing Law The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois without giving effect to 1 its conflict of laws provisions or ii the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods which is explicitly excluded You agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all disputes claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder Government End Users If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government this Da
273. h as an SD card fault Note The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information icon yellow After you read or delete the messages the icon returns to white Calendar Press the Information button gt Calendar You can view the 2 current calendar by day week or month 911 Assist If Equipped WARNING Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash the system will not dial for help which could delay response time potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash WARNING Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash the system or phone may be damaged or non functional WARNING Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in a crash Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly Note The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident Note Before setting this feature on make sure that you read the 911 Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 400 MyLincoln Touch Note If any user turns 911
274. h the list Menu control To change the menu control between Standard or Memory On refer to Vehicle gt Menu Control found in the table under Settings in this chapter e Standard when in the Display Trip or Fuel Economy sub categories scrolling up and down will always exit back to the main categories e Memory on when in the Display Trip or Fuel Economy sub categories scrolling up and down will display the previously selected sub categories INFORMATION MESSAGES Note Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle not all of the messages will display or be available Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus Message indicators Some messages will be supplemented by a system specific symbol 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Information Displays 115 Control Messages Malfunction preventing the ACC from engaging Available adaptive cruise cannot function properly Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when the radar is blocked because Available Sensor of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or Blocked ice mud water in front of radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve AdvanceTrac Ac
275. h tire and wheel assembly temporarily remove the load floor plastic stowage bins and the foam load floor supports to make space Place the 22 inch tire and wheel assembly in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is able to protrude through a wheel opening Replace the plastic stowage bins and foam load floor supports around the 22 inch tire and wheel assembly Note If you are stowing a flat tire place the tire in the spare tire well with the valve stem facing down Rotate the tire until the jack assembly is able to protrude through a wheel opening Note If you are stowing the spare tire place the spare in the spare tire well in its original position 1 Put the flat tire jack and lug wrench away Make sure the jack kit is secured in its original location and orientation in the jack kit recess under the flat or spare tire Unblock the wheels 2 Secure the wheel by replacing the washer and the wing nut and turning the wing nut clockwise 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 319 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they
276. he following commands 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 417 There are additional climate control commands but in order to access them you have to say Climate first then when the system is ready to listen you may say any of the following commands Automatic Panel off Rear defrost off Fan increase Temperature lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees My temp If you have said Temperature you can say any of the commands in the following Temperature chart TEMPERATURE lt 15 5 29 5 gt degrees lt 60 85 gt degrees Help 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 418 MyLincoln Touch NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Note The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the navigation system If you need a replacement SD card see your authorized dealer Note The SD card slot is spring loaded To remove the SD card just push the card in and release it Do not attempt to pull the card out to remove it this could cause damage Your navigation system is comprised of two main features destination mode and map mode To set a destination press the green corner of your touchscreen then Dest when it appears See Setting a destination later in this chapter To view the navigation map and your vehicle s current location touch the green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen or press Dest gt M
277. he consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson Moss Warranty Act 15 U S C sec 2301 et seq If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civ
278. he desired temperature using the temperature control The system automatically determines fan speed air distribution A C operation and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature I Rear defrost Turns the heated windows and mirrors off and on See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button turns them on also J Defrost Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice GENERAL OPERATING TIPS e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather select Defrost Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to improve clearing e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the air distribution setting that is selected 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Climate Control 129
279. he tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits Avoid fast starts stops and turns Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there is always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 306 Wheels and Tires If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tir
280. he vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for inspection maimtenance 1 M testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 106 Instrument Cluster Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on board diagnostics system OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Fuel and Refueling chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Speed control if equipped RTT The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system is in e On gray light type 1 and type 2 Illuminates when the speed control system is turned on Turns off when the speed control system is turned off e Engaged grey light type 1 green light type 2 Illuminates when the speed control system is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged Stability Control System tw Displays when the AdvanceTrac Traction control is active Pea if the light remains on have the system serviced immedi
281. heated seats Press the heated seat symbol located on the touchscreen to cycle through the various heat settings and off Warmer settings are indicated by more indicator lights If the engine falls below 350 rpms while the heated seats are on the feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated Cooled Seats The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running To operate the cooled seats A C Press the cooled seat symbol located on the touchscreen to cycle through the various cooling settings and off Cooler settings are indicated by more indicator lights If the engine falls below 350 rpms while the cooled seats are on the feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated Heated and Cooled Seat Air Filter Replacement If Equipped The climate controlled seat system includes air filters that must be replaced periodically See the scheduled maintenance information The filters are located under each front seat and can be accessed from the Znd row foot well area Move the front seats all the way forward and to the full up positions to ease access 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Seats 139 To remove an air filter 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Push up on the outside rigid edge of the filter and rotate counterclockwise once the tabs are released then remove the filter To install a filter 1 First position the filter in its housing making sure that the far f
282. heels and Tires Install cables securely verifying that the cables do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines Drive cautiously If you hear the cable chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and retighten the cables If this does not work remove the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed Do not use tire cables on dry roads TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when on
283. hen into position R before shifting back into position N 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 230 Driving Hints BREAKING IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 mi 480 km During this time your vehicle may exhibit some unique driving characteristics Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 mi 1600 km Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early Do not labor the engine Do not tow during the first 1000 miles 1600 km ECONOMICAL DRIVING Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive the conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel economy e Accelerate and slow down in a smooth moderate fashion e Drive at steady speeds without stopping e Anticipate stops slowing down may eliminate the need to stop e Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving e Close the windows for high speed driving e Drive at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 1596 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h e Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size e Use the recommended engine oil e Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance There are also some things you may not want to do because they may reduce your fuel economy e Sudden or hard accelerations e Rev the engine before turning it off e dle for periods longer th
284. hicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 37 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold tire pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 kilometers 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 295 e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label located on the B Pill
285. hicle s useful life Ford Motor Company however urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service Hot climate oil change intervals Vehicles operating in the Middle East North Africa Sub Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute API Certified for Gasoline Engines Certification mark oil of SM or SN quality the normal oil change interval is 5000 miles 8000 kilometers If the available API SM or SN oils are not available then the oil change service interval is 3000 miles 4800 kilometers 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 348 Scheduled Maintenance All wheel drive vehicles only Vehicles operating off road in sand during high ambient temperatures must replace the power transfer unit lube every 20000 miles 32000 kilometers Engine air filter amp cabin air filter replacement Engine air filter and cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD Initial change Six years or 100000 miles 160000 km whichever comes first After initial change Every three years or 50000 miles 80000 km Engine Coolant Change Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEacE Dearer VALIDATION
286. hird party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 448 Appendices You agree that your non exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your licenses terminate you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote respectively reserve all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide including any copyrighted material or music file information You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights collectively or separately under this agreement against you directly in each company s own name Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page at www gracenote com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONT
287. ho require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 521 4140 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursement information U S Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 521 4140 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Vehicles Sold in Canada Getting Roadside Assistance Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 Vehicles Sold in Canada Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In Canada the card is found in the warranty information in the glove box Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U S coverage Please see your warranty information or visit our website at www ford ca for information on Canadian services and benefits Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information call 1 800 665 2006 or visit our website at www ford ca HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel A by the radio Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists e Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash e Press the flasher control again to turn them off Note With extended use the flashers may run down your 12 volt battery 2013 MKX
288. ht or left side of the slider or slide your finger across the control to increase or decrease the fan speed C DUAL Allows the passenger to set their temperature independent of the driver temperature D Recirculated air Press this button to switch between outside air and recirculated air When the LED on the button lights up this indicates the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior when used with A C and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle Note Recirculated air engages automatically when you select MAX A C You can turn it on manually in any airflow mode except defrost E MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This position is more economical and efficient than normal A C 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 128 Climate Control F A C Press to turn air conditioning off and on Air conditioning cools the vehicle using outside air To improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes Use A C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Note A C turns on automatically in MAX A C Defrost and Floor Defrost G Power Press to turn the system off and on When the system is off outside air cannot enter the vehicle H AUTO Press to turn on fully automatic operation Select t
289. icle 1 Fully press the brake pedal 2 Make sure the transmission is in position P 9 Press the button The system does not function if e The key frequencies are jammed e The key battery has no charge 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Starting and Stopping the Engine 153 If you are unable to start your vehicle do the following 1 Locate the key backup slot at the front of the center console storage compartment 2 With the buttons facing down place the key into backup slot 3 With the key in this position press the brake pedal then the button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary 1 Move the transmission selector lever to position P 2 Press the button once Note The ignition all electrical circuits warning lamps and indicators switch off Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is in Motion A WARNING Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance The steering will not be locked but higher effort will be required When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits warning lights and indicators may also be off 1 Press and hold the button for one second or press it three times within two seconds 2 Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop 3 When your vehicle has sto
290. ift through all the gears while the engine is running Fuel system e Fill the fuel tank with high quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle Note During extended periods of vehicle storage 30 days or more fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation Add a quality gas stabilizer product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods exceed 30 days Follow the instructions on the additive label The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system Cooling system e Protect against freezing temperatures e When removing vehicle from storage check coolant fluid level Confirm there are no cooling system leaks and fluid is at the recommended level Battery e Check and recharge as necessary Keep connections clean e If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure battery charge is maintained for quick starting Note If battery cables are disconnected it will be necessary to reset memory features Brakes e Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released Tires e Maintain recommended air pressure 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Vehicle Care 289 Miscellaneous e Make sure all linkages cables levers and pins under vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust e Move vehicles at least 25 f
291. ight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 centimeters of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 28 Child Safety The
292. ignal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING to interference indicate the interference and the audio system may mute SIRIUS Troubleshooting Tips Radio Display Possible Action Acquiring Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel Sat Fault SIRIUS There is an internal If this message does system failure module or system not clear shortly or failure present with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service Invalid Channel The channel is no Tune to another longer available channel or choose another preset 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 375 SIRIUS Troubleshooting Tips Radio Display Possible Action Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this No Signal channel The signal is lost from Updating the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to your vehicle antenna Update of channel programming in progress Your satellite service is no longer available Call SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 No Channels Available All the channels in the selected channels are either skipped or locked SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your vehicle Subscription Updated 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing
293. il Code Section 1793 22 b or the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance 243 THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services You Need section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation and if your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB You are not bound by the decision and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute and decision are admissible in the co
294. ill change from red to red and green 2 Press the same button twice to confirm the change If done correctly the LED will turn green Programming HomeLinkQO to the Genie Intellicode garage door opener motor Note You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor To program HomeLink to the garage door opener motor 1 Press and hold the PROGRAM button on the garage door opener motor until both blue LED s turn on 2 Release the PROGRAM button Only the smaller round LED should be on 3 Press and release the program button The larger purple LED will flash Note The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds 4 Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand held transmitter s previously programmed button Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple 5 Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for 2 seconds Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves Programming is now complete At this point programming is complete 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 148 Universal Garage Door Opener Clearing a HomeLink device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds at which time both buttons should be released Programming has now been erased and the
295. in the information display while the system is active Resuming the Set Speed Note Resume should only be used if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it Press and release RES CNCL The vehicle will return to the previously set speed The set speed will display continuously in the information display while the system is active 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 196 Cruise Control Low Speed Automatic Cancellation The system is not functional at vehicle speeds below 16 mph 26 km h An audible alarm sounds and the automatic braking released if the vehicle drops below this speed Hilly Condition Usage Note An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it is applying brakes for an extended period of time This allows the brakes to cool down The system will function normally again when the brakes have cooled down You should select a lower gear position when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades for example driving in mountainous areas Your vehicle needs additional engine braking in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating Switching Off Adaptive Cruise Control Note The set speed memory will erase when you switch the system off Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition Detection Issues The radar sensor has a limited field of vision It may not detect
296. ind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance signal that you are going to change lanes Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 98 Windows and Mirrors The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches A The image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches B The vehicle will transition to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror C Blind Spot Information System BLIS with Cross Traffic Alert CTA If Equipped Refer to Blind Spot Information System BLISO with Cross Traffic Alert CTA in the Driving Aids chapter INTERIOR MIRROR WARNING Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference Some mirrors also have a second pivot point This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Windows and Mirrors 99 Auto Dimming Mirror Note Do not block the senso
297. ined When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e nsert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling e Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in the upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode See Step 5 This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child Safety 25 Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap and shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 26
298. ing illuminates footwells and cupholders with a choice of colors To access and make adjustments 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Ambient Lighting 2 Touch the desired color 3 Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity To turn the feature on or off press the power button Vehicle Health Report Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports Press for more information on these selections When done making your selections press Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want your report Door Keypad Code To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Door Keypad Code 2 Enter your current factory code then when prompted enter your new code Rear View Camera This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Rear View Camera then select from the following settings e Rear Camera Delay e Visual Park Aid Alert e Guidelines 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 406 MyLincoln Touch Enable Valet Mode Note If the system locks and you need to reset the PIN enter 3681 and the system unlocks Valet mode allows you to lock the system No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN 1 Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle gt Enable Valet Mode 2
299. ing with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Note Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines CLEANING THE INTERIOR WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Vehicle Care 285 For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft amp Spot and Stain Remover In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner If a ring for
300. ion the surface of the road may because it may not detect warn interfere with the radar signals or respond to potential collisions Desert remote area with no other Wait a short time or switch to vehicles and no roadside objects normal cruise control Due to the nature of radar technology it is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked This can happen for example when driving in sparse rural or desert environments A false blocked condition will either self clear or clear after a key cycle Switching to Normal Cruise Control WARNING Normal cruise control will not brake due to slower vehicles Always be aware of which mode is selected and apply the brakes when necessary You can manually change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display The cruise control indicator light will replace the adaptive P cruise control indicator light if normal cruise control is selected The gap setting will not be displayed the system will not automatically respond to lead vehicles and automatic braking will not be activated The system will default to adaptive cruise control when the engine is started 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 200 Driving Aids BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM BLISO WITH CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT CTA IF EQUIPPED WARNING To help avoid injuries NEVER use the BLISO as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors
301. ions 320 Engine specifications llle 320 Part NUM ox det d UE ee EY Ewa OL ORES yu 324 Vehicle identification number 00 000000 E Eras 324 Vehicle certification label lille 325 Transmission code designation llle 326 Accessories 327 ACCOSSOTIES i v bn reg POR fet ES perte peg AUR She be a 327 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 8 Table of Contents Ford Extended Service Plan 329 Scheduled Maintenance 332 Normal scheduled maintenance andloB lilius 337 MyLincoln Touch 349 Infotainment display ooo 355 Volce TECOSMIUION is dera gue ens tds dci 356 Listening to MUSIC tige ais Ob dla Res A ew 362 Phone features 9 rnc yc Ryu acr ka c EUREN Y Up 384 Information Menu 42s wkRee aaa 392 DEMNI s cuo ed ad eee Hee Ee a ew Red cuc ee be d 403 Climate features oss 3 a BA A EK EAE a RES 414 Navigation system 0 0 00 0 eee 418 Appendices 430 Index 450 The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print In the interest of continuous development we reserve the right to change specifications design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission Errors and omissions excepted Ford Motor Company 2012 2013 MKX mkx
302. isplays ammm ehildproof 2 seeseucts tients 31 Inspection maintenance 1 M o 69 E 165 Lubsami apena 2xcacs 321 Instrument panel cleaning ssseseeeen 285 DUB TES serias ani 319 Cluster esee renti 102 Intelligent Access Key 57 M J Making and receiving calls 386 MAP DVD Loading and Jack sprae nena 313 Unloading 386 positioning s s a Map icons ee 426 ALTRES Tn imo s ce Map mode inet 424 DUIS anlanis YOUR HO ses Map preferences 423 K Map updates s 428 Message center sss 108 Keyless entry system warning messages 114 autolock used Re 71 keypad crest otii bois 7t Mirrors sss 96 98 locking and unlocking doors 8 fold AWAY o 97 programming entry code 77 programmable memory 59 side view mirrors power 96 KEYS zoe eere pen 79 MOON POOL 5 uie mee 100 L Motorcraft amp parts 281 324 TM Lamps MyFord Touch system 349 bulb replacement ludi A 63 specifications chart 280 MyLincoln Touch system 125 headlamps flash to pass 89 interior lamps 93 94 N replacing bulbs 276 LATCH anchors e 27 Navigation features 418 Liftgate oo 70 73 213 Navigation voice commands 428 INOCIB CATIONS oi
303. ited States are not eligible for Ford ESP coverage This information is subject to change For more information visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www ford ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 332 Scheduled Maintenance GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Why Maintain Your Vehicle Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established based upon rigorous testing It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times These intervals serve two purposes one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning the vehicle down It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified in the Capacities and Specifications chapter Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership Factory Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory sponsored certification training to help th
304. ized dealer e using the information display Illuminated Entry The interior lamps parking lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate when you use the intelligent access key or the keyless entry keypad to unlock your vehicle The system will turn off the lights if e you switch the ignition on e you press the lock button on the remote control e you lock the vehicle using the keyless entry keypad e they have been on for 25 seconds The lights will not turn off if e you have turned them on with the dimmer control e any door is open 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Locks 73 Illuminated Exit The interior dome lamps parking lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate when all doors are closed and the ignition is turned off The lights turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse e you press the START STOP button Battery Saver If you leave the courtesy lamps dome lamps or headlamps on the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys If you shut off the engine and leave the ignition in the on or accessory mode the ignition will shut off after 30 minutes LIFTGATE WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a crash people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in
305. ked up to the recreational vehicle or tow dolly You can tow your front wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider If you are towing with all four wheels on the ground see the following instructions 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Towing 229 You can tow your all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer Do not tow your all wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly and the rear wheels on the ground This causes damage to your all wheel drive system If you are using a vehicle transport trailer follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider If you are towing with all four wheels on the ground see the following instructions If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Tow only in the forward direction Release the parking brake Place the transmission in position N Place the ignition in the accessory mode See Ignition in the Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter Do not exceed 65 mph 105 km h Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and every six hours thereafter With the engine running and your foot on the brake shift into position D and t
306. l Wheel Drive If Equipped Note Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and PTU power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Note Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turnaround b
307. l mode feature is also available when the voice system displays a list of items to pick from during a voice session where you would be able to touch the line item or say Line 2 If the system does not understand a voice command or there are multiple options the system displays a voice command list for you ENTERTAINMENT Your system offers many media options You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands Browsing Device Content When listening to any type of audio you can browse through other devices without having to change sources For example if you are currently listening to the radio you can browse all the artists that are stored on your USB device Press the voice icon on the steering wheel When prompted us you can say If you have said Browse you can then say any commands in the following chart 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 363 lt Sirius category gt Channels CD track list BROWSE Sirius channel guide For a complete list of Browse voice commands see USB and SD card voice commands and Bluetooth audio voice commands in the following sections AM FM Radio Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select J the AM or FM tab To change between AM and FM presets just touch the AM or FM tab When you select Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the me
308. lable and selected to AUTO in the information display The rear defroster and heated mirrors are automatically turned on Last Settings You can set the climate control to operate using the last climate control settings through the information display setting Remote Start gt Climate Control gt Heater A C gt Last Settings The climate control system automatically uses the settings last selected before the vehicle was turned off Heated and Cooled Devices The climate control system controls other heated and cooled devices inside the vehicle These devices if available and selected to AUTO in the information displays may also be switched on during remote start Heated devices are typically switched on during cold weather and cooled devices during hot weather 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 132 Seats SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seat back with your feet on the floor WARNING Do not recline the seat back as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not place objects higher than the seat backs to reduce the risk of injury in a crash
309. le coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six The automatic transmission shift strategy has the ability to detect hilly terrain or mountainous areas and will provide a limited amount of grade assist features automatically 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Transmission 167 S Sport Moving the gearshift lever to S Sport e Provides additional gr
310. leaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing or damage to the leather CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS Note Do not use chrome cleaner metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Vehicle Care 287 e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Industrial strength heavy duty cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clear coat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time 30 days or more read the following maintenance recomme
311. led should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user s authority to operate the equipment 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Auxiliary Power Points 149 AUXILIARY POWER POINTS Note Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Note Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Note Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Note Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket if equipped Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty and can result in fire or serious injury Auxiliary power points may be found e on the passenger side of the center console near the instrument panel e in the center console storage compartment e on the rear of the center console on the left
312. lippery surface The electronic stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction See the Traction Control chapter for details on traction control system operation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Stability Control 183 A Vehicle without AdvanceTracO with RSC skidding off its intended route I i B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with i RSC maintaining control on a slippery surface el d 4 2 USING ADVANCETRACO WITH RSCO The system automatically activates when you start your engine The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in position R You can turn the traction control portion of the system off independently See the Traction Control chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 184 Parking Aids SENSING SYSTEM WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the system as contained in this section Sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Traffic control systems inclement weather air brakes and external motors and fans ma
313. ll and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning or replacement e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Driving Hints 233 N WARNING Continued e Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation causing loss of control of vehicle e To install floor mats position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the retention post and press down to lock in e To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 234 Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the U S Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours a day seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your owner s manual portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key repl
314. lt in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 218 Load Carrying GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not us
315. luid capacities 321 Four Wheel Drive vehicles driving off road 173 Fuel yo rA 161 CADACI N vida 321 choosing the right fuel 158 filler funnel oo eee 159 filling your vehicle with fuel 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 161 filter specifications 268 324 fuel pump shut off 236 octane rating 158 320 qual aran 158 running out of fuel 159 safety information relating to automotive fuels 157 Fuel flex fuel vehicle FEV 157 FUSES 248 249 253 G Garage door opener 143 Gas cap see Fuel cap 161 GaluBes auia ie 102 H Hazard flashers 235 HD Radio piriona 365 Headlamps MINE oscar reos 273 274 bulb specifications 280 flash to DASS aussi 89 high beati eene 89 replacing bulbs 276 Head restraints 133 Heated steering wheel 414 A rerom hg 127 ly lop 413 Hill start assist inca 170 Homelink wireless control NO drakem S re aE 143 A O 258 How to use voice commands Index 453 I Listening to music 362 ETT NER EIE g20 Load limits sese 213 Illuminated visor mirror 99 Locks Inf ion disnl 108 AUILOLOCK x dd 71 niorma on d
316. luminates when the adaptive cruise control system is turned on Turns off when the speed control system is turned off e Engaged green light Illuminates when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged Airbag readiness If this light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on PAN continues to flash or remains on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible A chime will sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash a 5 malfunction has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Brake system warning light OLO To confirm the brake system warning light is functional it will eee momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If it illuminates when you are driving check that the parking brake is not engaged If the parking brake is not engaged this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction Have the system checked immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance
317. ly and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire Wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 millimeters tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 millimeters When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 303 Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use such as load speed inflation pressure the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replac
318. ly and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the lock position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Note Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Note Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Emergency Maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and
319. m your voice commands The system creates these lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command To access these settings using the touchscreen 1 Press the Settings icon gt Settings gt Voice Control 2 Select from e Interaction Mode e Confirmation Prompts e Media Candidate Lists e Phone Candidate Lists e Voice Control Volume To access these settings using voice commands EE Press the voice icon Wait for the prompt Please say a i command Another tone sounds to let you know the system is listening Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch between using voice commands and making on screen selections This is most often available when using navigation Buttons outlined in blue indicate selections that are part of the dual mode feature For example if while you are in a voice session rather than saying the command Enter Street Name to change the field you can press Street and the voice session does not end Instead the voice system changes to the Street field and asks you to say the street name You cannot use the buttons not outlined in blue as voice commands If they are touched during a voice session the voice session ends 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 360 MyLincoln Touch For example you can choose from the following on the Navigation home screen My H
320. main menu from the information display controls and select Settings then MyKey by pressing OK or the gt button Press OK to select Create When prompted hold the OK button until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey The key will be restricted at the next start Que LS The key is successfully programmed Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys To program optional settings for the key s see the Programming Changing Optional Settings chapter Programming Changing Optional Settings Note All programmed keys can be cleared within the same key cycle in which a key was programmed otherwise an admin key is required to clear the keys To clear all keys refer to Clearing all MyKeys You can access the optional settings through the information display control Turn the ignition on using an admin key Access the main menu and select Settings then MyKey Use the arrow buttons to get to an optional feature Press OK or gt to scroll through settings Press OK or gt to make a selection guis 99 Ro E 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyKey 65 CLEARING ALL MYKEYS Note All programmed MyKeys can be cleared within the same key cycle in which a MyKey was created otherwise an admin key is required to clear the keys To clear all MyKeys which removes all restrictions and returns them to admin key status use the information display controls to
321. mal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers In addition the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly If this occurs let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and controlled manner Automatic Locking Mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible See the Child Safety chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Safety Belts 37 How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the saf
322. may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 104 Instrument Cluster Charging system RTT Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays E on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Door ajar RTT Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed Engine oil pressure RTT E Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range Engine coolant temperature RTT E Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the mel vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Grade assist if equipped RTT Illuminates when grade assist is turned on 2 Heads up display if equipped A red beam of lights will illuminate on the windshield in certain M instances when using adaptive cruise control and or the collision warning system It will also illuminate momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works High beams Es Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are on Low fuel RTT Illuminates when the
323. mbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 330 Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings e Spark plugs except California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest Free Finance Options Available e Shock absorbers Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 1096 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity Protect Yourself from the Rising Cost of Vehicle Repairs with a Ford Extended Service Plan To learn more call our For
324. me Screen Wallpaper Note You cannot load photos directly from your camera You must access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an SD card Note Photographs with extremely large dimensions i e 2048 x 1536 may not be compatible and appear as a blank black image on the display Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos To access press the Settings icon Display Edit Wallpaper and then follow the system prompts to upload your photographs Only the photograph s which meets the following conditions display e Compatible file formats are as follows jpg gif png bmp e Each file must be 1 5 MB or less e Recommended dimensions 800 x 384 Sound Press the Settings icon Sound then select from the following Sound Settings Bass THX Deep Note Demo Set Balance and Fade Speed Compensated Volume If equipped 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 405 Vehicle Press the Settings icon gt Vehicle then select from the following e Active Park Assist Ambient Lighting Vehicle Health Report Door Keypad Code Rear View Camera Enable Valet Mode Active Park Assist When activated your system displays directions for you regarding the active park assist process For complete information on this system see Active park assist in the Driving Aids chapter Ambient Lighting If Equipped When activated ambient light
325. me control Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes distortion and reduces sound quality If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problem persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable media player Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with headphones as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control such as Play or Pause over the attached portable media player PHONE Hands free calling is one of the main features of SYNCO Once you pair your phone you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands While the system supports a variety of features many are dependent on your cellular phone s functionality At a minimum most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions Answering an incoming call Ending a call Using privacy mode Dialing a number Redialing Call waiting notification Caller ID Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download are phone dependent features To check your phone s compatibility see your phone s user manual and visit www SYNCMyRide com www SYNCMyRide ca or www syncmaroute ca 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 385 Pairing Your Phone for the First Time W
326. ment na doit jamais d pesser kg ou Nu CORESSION DES SEE OWNER S PNEU PNEUS A FROID MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI INFORMATION REAR E VOIR LE MANUEL P235 70R16 240 KPA 35 PSI De r usAGER SPARE POUR PLUS DE mL E T145 90R17 415 KPA 60 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS XXX XX XXXX XXXXA XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX LER ES 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 216 Load Carrying CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your a l GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight
327. ment parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off highway usage 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Brakes 179 GENERAL INFORMATION Note Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking it should be inspected by an authorized dealer Note Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels even under normal driving conditions Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel cleaning instructions OLO See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the Y brake system warning light Wet brakes result in reduced braking effici
328. milar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sized between the front and rear axles could cause the system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 292 Wheels and Tires How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles Crossover vehicles can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces As a result of the above dimensional differences crossover vehicles often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading lt Tire Quality Grades apply to new Cw pneumatic passenger car tires The Tire A Quality Grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Gra
329. ming a Memory Position Note A memory position may be programmed at any time e To program position 1 move the memory features to the desired positions using the associated controls Press and hold button 1 for at least two seconds A chime will sound confirming that a memory position has been set e To program position 2 repeat the previous procedure using button 2 Recalling a Memory Position A programmed memory position can be recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on e only in position P or N if the ignition is on Press the desired memory control to recall a memory position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Seats 137 Recalling a Memory Position with the Remote Control The memory positions are also recalled when you press unlock on your remote control if the transmitter is programmed to a memory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position If the easy entry feature is enabled the seat will first move to the easy entry position The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition or when the push button start system is put in accessory mode or started To program the memory feature to a remote control see Keys and remote control Easy Entry and Exit Feature This feature automatically moves the steering wheel all the way up and in and moves the driver s seat rearward 2 inches 5 centimeters when
330. mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuel and Refueling 163 Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance i
331. mo DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume Your vehicle may not have all of these sound options e Hazard flasher Switch the hazard flashers off and on 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 352 MyLincoln Touch Cleaning the Touchscreen Display Use a clean soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses If dirt or fingerprints are still visible apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display Support The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own Monday Saturday 8 30am 8 00pm EST In the United States call 1 888 270 1055 In Canada call 1 800 565 3673 Times are subject to change due to holidays SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account e Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports online e Required to activate the subscription based SYNC Services and to personalize your Saved Points and Favorites e Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC e Access to customer support for any questions you may have Safety Information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their foc
332. mory preset areas There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station Sound returns when finished HD Radio Turn the feature on This allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally where available providing free crystal clear sound See HD Radio information later in this chapter Go to the next strong AM or FM radio station 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 364 MyLincoln Touch Options Sound Settings allows you to adjust Bass Midrange Treble Balance and Fade DSP Digital Signal Processing Occupancy Mode and Speed Compensated Volume settings Your vehicle may not have all these settings Set PTY for Seek Scan allows you to select category of music you would like to search for and then choose to either seek or scan for the stations information broadcast by FM stations Auto Presets AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current location TAG Button if available allows you to tag a song to download later When you select On TAG appears on screen when HD Radio is active You can touch TAG to save the information of the song that is playing When you plug in your portable music player the information transfers if supported by your device When you are connected to iTunes the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to download See HD Radio information later in this chapter Direct Tune Enter the desired
333. ms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces If a spill occurs wipe off immediately Damage may not be covered by your warranty 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 286 Vehicle Care If a staining liquid like coffee or
334. n acquire the digital signal As with any saved radio station you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station s reception area 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 367 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area the station may mute due to weak signal strength If you are listening to HD1 the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again However if you are listening to any of the possible HD2 through HD7 multicast channels the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again Station blending When the system first receives a station aside from HD2 HD7 multicast stations it first plays the station in the analog version Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station it shifts to the digital version Depending on the station quality you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound In order to provide the best possible experience use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology Independent entities own and operate each sta
335. n if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as mobile phones Note A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine Note When locking your vehicle any remote controls left inside the vehicle may become disabled A message may appear in the information display indicating that there is no key detected if you try to start the engine Press the unlock button on the remote control to enable it then start the engine 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 152 Starting and Stopping the Engine Ignition Modes Off Turns the ignition off e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not in motion Accessory Allows some electrical accessories to operate while the engine is not running e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once On All electrical circuits are operational Warning lamps and indicators are illuminated e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button once from accessory mode e Without applying the brake pedal press and release the button twice from off mode Start Starts the engine e Press the brake pedal and then press the button for any length of time An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition is on and when the engine starts Starting Your Veh
336. n or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seat back with your feet on the floor WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the passenger seat sensing system WARNING Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system which could seriously increase the risk of injury or death This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 48 Supplementary Restraints System The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator which will illuminate indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either ON enabled ONT or OFF disabled The indic
337. nce between the vehicle ahead until e the vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed e the vehicle in front of you moves out of your lane or out of view e the vehicle speed falls below 16 mph 26 km h e anew gap distance is set 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 194 Cruise Control The vehicle brakes will be automatically applied to slow the vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front The maximum braking which is applied by the system is limited and can be overridden by the driver applying the brakes If the system predicts that its maximum braking level will not be sufficient an audible warning will sound while the system continues to brake This is accompanied by a heads up display a red warning bar illuminating on the windshield Take immediate action Setting the Gap Distance Note It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you by pressing the GAP control up or down The selected gap will display in the information display as shown by the bars in the graphic Four gap distance settings are available 5 You can decrease or increase the Graphic Following Following Dynamic display distance distance at behavior bars between vehicles Each time you restart your vehicle the system will select the last chosen gap for the current Disengaging Adaptive
338. nches 1 45 meters tall or 80 pounds 36 kilograms Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position See Front Passenger Sensing System in the Supplementary Restraints System chapter for more information 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Child Safety 19 CHILD SEATS Use a child safety seat sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat for infants toddlers or children weighing 40 pounds 18 kilograms or less generally age four or younger CHILD SEAT POSITIONING WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided
339. nd on the Safety Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires These differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire A LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association that is intended for service on light trucks B Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits C Maximum Load Dual lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle D Maximum Load Single Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 299 Inform
340. nd a moving object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph 5 km h 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 186 Parking Aids REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM WARNING The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle WARNING Use caution when using the rear video camera and the liftgate is ajar If the liftgate is ajar the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect All guidelines if enabled have been removed when the liftgate is ajar WARNING Use caution when turning camera features on or off while in R Reverse Make sure the vehicle is not moving The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind the vehicle During operation lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle The camera is located on the liftgate 5 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Parking Aids 187 Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays
341. nd remove button C then pull up on the head restraint Reinstall Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks Tilting Head Restraints If Equipped The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort To tilt the head restraint do the following z 9 1 Adjust the seat back to an upright driving or I riding position 2 Tilt the head restraint forward by gently pulling the top of the head restraint Once it is in its forward most position tilt it forward once more to release it to the upright position Note Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted Instead continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Seats POWER SEATS 135 WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seat back when the vehicle is moving WARNING Before returning the seat back to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seat back aa 4 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 136 Seats Power Lumbar MEMORY FUNCTION The memory control located on the instrument panel allows automatic positioning of the driver seat and power Ay mirrors to two programmable positions You may also have this feature for the power tilt and telescopic steering column e Program
342. ndations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for reliable regular driving Long term storage under various conditions may lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are taken to preserve the components General e Store all vehicles in a dry ventilated place e Protect from sunlight if possible e If vehicles are stored outside they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage Body e Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt grease oil tar or mud from exterior surfaces rear wheel housing and underside of front fenders e Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations e Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust e Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration Re wax as necessary when the vehicle is washed e Lubricate all hood door and trunk lid hinges and latches with a light grade oil e Cover interior trim to prevent fading e Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 288 Vehicle Care Engine e The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage as used engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage e Start the engine every 15 days Run at fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature e With your foot on the brake sh
343. ne resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 521 4140 TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www lincolnowner com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code e Owner Guides e Maintenance Schedules e Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance 241 In Canada Mailing address Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacti
344. nformation The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Any non Lincoln custom electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Ford Extended Service Plan 329 FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS U S ONLY More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited War
345. ng a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 242 Customer Assistance IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use T
346. ng any of the actions above otherwise the alarm will trigger 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 82 Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving Note Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position See Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter 1 Unlock the steering column 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position 3 Lock the steering column 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Steering Wheel 83 Power Tilt and Telescope Steering Column If Equipped WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving Note Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position Refer to Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter Use the control on the side of the steering column to adjust the position To adjust e tilt use the top or bottom of the control e telescope use the front or rear of the control Easy Entry and Exit Feature When you switch the ignition off the steering column will move to the full up and in position to allow extra room to exit your vehicle The column will return to the previous setting when you switch the ignition on You can enable or disable this feature in the information display Memory Feature The steering column position saves when you do a memory set function You can recall it with the memory feature
347. ngs make the following selections in the touch screen when the transmission is not in R Reverse 1 Menu 2 Vehicle 3 Rear View Camera After changing a system setting the touch screen shows a preview of the feature s selected 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 188 Parking Aids Guidelines and the Centerline Note Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The centerline is only available if Fixed guidelines are on A Rear bumper p B Fixed guideline Red zone p N C Fixed guideline Yellow zone l E D Fixed guideline Green zone B A E Centerline The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position Always use caution while reversing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle Selectable settings for this feature are FIXED and OFF Visual Park Aid Alert Note Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R Reverse Note The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The visual park aid alert allows the driver to view the area that is being det
348. nition is switched on One or both systems can also be switched off permanently at your authorized dealer Once switched off switching it back on must also be done at the dealership COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid It is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment or the need to apply the brakes This system does NOT activate the brakes automatically Failure to press the brake pedal to activate the brakes may result in a collision WARNING The collision warning system with brake support cannot help prevent all collisions Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain distance and speed Note The system does not detect warn or respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of the vehicle Note The collision warning system is active at speeds above approximately 5 mph 8 km h This system is designed to alert DEED the driver of certain collision risks A radar detects if your vehicle is rapidly approaching another vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 206 Driving Aids LS If it is a red warning light illuminates and an audible warning chime sounds The brake support system assists the driver in reducing the collision speed by charging the brakes If the risk of collision further increases after
349. non Ford approved remote start system the default settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its associated privileges It is NOT compatible with MyKey Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition cylinder it may help you to retain some MyKey functions 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 66 MyKey In addition to the key that has been programmed as a MyKey owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys have the option to program the non Ford approved remote start system as a MyKey if the remote start fob is used by the MyKey driver To program a non Ford approved remote start system as a MyKey do the following 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using a non Ford approved remote start fob 3 Follow Steps 1 5 in the Creating a MyKey section Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent Access Key Push Button Start Note It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key push button start Therefore you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other admin key When the vehicle is started using remote start the system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle into gear Prior to the engine stall the vehicle will have administrative privileges When you restart the engine the vehicle will identify the user as an admin or MyK
350. not find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance 245 If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia Pacific Region Sub Saharan Africa U S Virgin Islands Central America the Caribbean and Israel contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS amp GLOBAL INITIATIVES 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 For customers in Guam the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands CNMI America Samoa and the U S Virgin Islands please feel free to call our Toll Free Number 800 841 FORD 8673 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Puerto Rico contact the nearest authorized d
351. not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters There is a risk of electrical shock Note The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below O F 18 C The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant This allows the climate control system to respond quickly The equipment includes a heater element installed in the engine block and a wire harness You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 156 Starting and Stopping the Engine We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association This extension cord must be able to be used outdoors in cold temperatures and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug and the heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water This could cause an electric shock or fire e Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area clear of combustibles e Make sure the heater heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected
352. ns do not connect or adjust the settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is in motion WARNING Store the portable music player in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when your vehicle is in motion Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while your vehicle is in motion 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 383 Your A V inputs allow you to connect an auxiliary audio video source such as a gaming systems or a personal camcorder QUUD by connecting RCA cords not included to these input jacks The jacks are yellow red and white and are located either behind a small access door on the instrument panel or in your center console You can also use the A V inputs as an auxiliary input jack to play music from your portable music player over your vehicle s speakers Plug in your 1 8 inch 3 5 millimeter RCA adapter into the two left A V input jacks red and white Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen and then select A V In To use the auxiliary input jack feature make sure that your portable music player is designed for use with headphones and that it is fully charged You also need an audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8th inch A 5 millimeter connector
353. ntellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE are owned by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY or their affiliates or suppliers The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties This EULA grants you no rights to use such content All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS Microsoft Corporation FORD MOTOR COMPANY third party software and service providers their affiliates and suppliers Use of any on line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form you may print one copy of such electronic documentation EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U S and European Union export jurisdiction You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S
354. ntion away from the road and possibly cause an accident or other serious consequences Do not change system settings or enter data non verbally using your hands while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations This is important since while setting up or changing some functions you might be required to distract your attention away from the road and remove your hands from the wheel General operation Voice Command Control Functions within the Windows Automotive based system may be accomplished using only voice commands Using voice commands while driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel Prolonged Views of Screen Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time Volume Setting Do not raise the volume excessively Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident Use of Speech Recognition Functions Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is subject to errors It is your responsibility to monitor any spee
355. o adjust the time delay using the display controls in the instrument cluster See the Information Displays chapter DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision The system switches the headlamps on with a reduced output vehicles equipped with halogen headlamps or turns the front fog lamps on vehicles equipped with HID headlamps in low light situations To switch the system on 1 Switch the ignition on 2 Switch the lighting control to the off autolamp or parking lamp position 3 Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P 4 Make sure the parking brake is disengaged 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 92 Lighting FRONT FOG LAMPS The fog lamps can be turned on when the lighting control is in the headlamps parking lamps or autolamps positions and the high beams are not turned on ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS if equipped The headlamp beams move in the same direction as the steering wheel which provides more visibility when driving around curves A Without adaptive headlamps B With adaptive headlamps Note The system has a power up movement check feature
356. o the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 32 km h for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is on visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check the air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 313 CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your tire pressure monit
357. ocumentation FORD SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE and or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and or communicate with or may be later upgraded to interface with and or communicate with additional software and or systems provided by third party software and service suppliers The additional software and services of third party origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved e The MS SOFTWARE FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as SOFTWARE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as otherwise interfacing with systems and or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing
358. ody type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG ATE XX XX FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX KPa XX PSLOOLD AL XXX KPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE XXXXX XXXXX VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ELEME HET ATE IUE UL TYPE XXX EXT PNT DSO ITR SPR XXXXX X XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX _XXXX XXXXXXX XX XX RC XX we TINTTR TP PS TR TAXLE XXX XX X X 2013 MKX mkx The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar the door latch post or the edge of the door near the door latch next to the driver s seating position Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 326 Capacities and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO You can find a transmission code on DATE XXIKX GVWREXXXXXLB XXXXXKG the Safety Compliance Certification FRONT GAWR XXXXL REARGAWR XXXXLB Label The following table tells you XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH
359. olve Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Collision Warning Displayed when there is a system malfunction Malfunction with the collision warning system The system will be disabled Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Collision Warning Displayed when there is a system malfunction Display Fault with the collision warning system display Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Action Description X Door Ajar Displayed when a door is not completely closed Liftgate Ajar Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Information Displays 119 Fuel Messages Action Description properly closed Fuel Level Low XXX Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel Access Messages No Key Detected Displayed if the intelligent access key is not detected by the system in the following three scenarios eWhen the start stop button is pressed in an attempt to either start the engine or cycle through the ignition states eWhen the engine is running and a door is opened then closed eWhen the vehicle s speed exceeds 10 mph 16 km h for the first time after starting Key Programmed x Displayed during spare key programming Keys Total when an intelligent access key is programmed to the system Max Number of Keys Displayed during spare key programming when Programmed the maximum number of keys have been Press Brake to Start
360. om Apple amp When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 382 MyLincoln Touch Bluetooth Audio Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle s speakers from your connected Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To access press the lower left corner on the touchscreen then J select the BT Stereo tab Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands E If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice i amp button on the steering wheel control When prompted say Next song Pause Play or Previous song If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device press the voice button and after the tone say Bluetooth Audio then Next song Pause Play or Previous song AN Inputs WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible Make sure that you are aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while the vehicle is in motion WARNING For safety reaso
361. omatic transmission SST use the currently selected gear will appear in the display Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the level indicator will be in the normal range If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool e Intelligent AWD if equipped displays power distribution between the front and rear wheels More power to either front or rear wheels will be displayed by more area filled in Trip 1 amp 2 Choose between the standard or enhanced trip display See the MN Settings chart following to reach the trip display settings Trip 1 amp 2 Standard display ee Trip distance Elapsed trip time X Average fuel economy Po X Estimated amount of fuel consumed Po X Total odometer lower left corner Press OK to pause the Trip 1 or 2 screen Press again to un pause Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information e Trip distance shows the accumulated trip distance e Elapsed trip time timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Information Displays 111 e Average fuel economy shows the average fuel economy for a given trip e Estimated amount of fuel consumed shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip
362. ome Favorites Previous Destinations Point of Interest POI Emergency Street Address Intersection Cancel Route Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are If you choose Street Address from the navigation screen you can choose from the following e Number e City e Street Name e State Prov Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 361 If you choose Points of Interest from the navigation screen you can choose from the following Search Area Search By Name Fuel Station ATM All Restaurants Accommodations Parking Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are POINTS OF INTEREST or POI Destination POI category name gt Search by category Change search area Note These are just a sample of the voice commands available within the Points of Interest section the categories themselves are also technically voice commands If you choose Intersection from the navigation screen you can choose from the following e ist Street e 2nd Street e City e State Prov Some of the voice commands that are available while viewing this screen are Enter city Change city Enter state Change state 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 362 MyLincoln Touch The dua
363. on On board Diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the on board diagnostics system OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel No Cap Fuel System in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine start up followed by mixed city or highway driving No additional vehicle service is required 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide g
364. on and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information Note Make sure that the level is between the COLD FILL RANGE marks on the coolant reservoir Note Coolant expands when it is hot The level may extend beyond the upper COLD FILL RANGE mark Note If the level is at the lower COLD FILL RANGE mark below the lower COLD FILL RANGE mark or empty add coolant immediately See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48 to 50 which equates to a freeze point between 30 degrees Fahrenheit 34 degrees Centigrade and 34 degrees Fahrenheit 37 degrees Centigrade Note For best results coolant concentration should be tested with a refractometer such as Rotunda tool ROB75240 available from your dealer Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentrations Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding Engine Coolant WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could
365. on your own EARNE You can then preview the message verify the recipient as wells as update the message list and send it to a connected device such as a USB drive 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 389 Pre defined Text Message Options TII call you back in a few minutes Stuck in traffic Call me later Receiving a Text Message Note If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 5 mph 8 km h the system offers to read the message to you instead of allowing you to view it while driving OK Yes No LOL When a new message arrives an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop up with the caller name and ID if supported by your phone You can press e View to view the text message e Listen for SYNC to read the message to you e Dial to call the contact e Ignore to exit the screen 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 390 MyLincoln Touch Phone Settings Press Phone gt Settings then select from the following settings 1f you select Bluetooth Devices Connect disconnect add or delete a device as well as save it as a favorite Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth off or on Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring in the vehicle With this feature turned on text message notifications also do not ring inside the cabin Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature See 911 Assist in the SY
366. onditions e Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted such as entering a navigation destination or editing information e All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries See the following chart for more specific examples Restricted Features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone contacts from a USB phone call entries System Functionality Editing settings while the rear view camera or Active Park Assist are active 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 354 MyLincoln Touch Restricted Features Wi Fi and Wireless Videos Photos and Graphics Text Messages Navigation Privacy Information When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently Among other things this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book text messages read and unread and call history including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system In addition if you connect a media device the system creates and retains an index of supported media content The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the
367. op lamp It is designed to last the life of the vehicle If replacement is required see your authorized dealer Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position y 9 F y 2 Remove the two screws and the license plate lamp assembly from the liftgate 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight out from the lamp assembly 4 Install new bulb s in reverse order 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 280 Maintenance BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Number of Bulbs Tode Number Headlamp low high beam 9 HIR halogen Headlamp low high beam HID 3 Front sidemarker lamp N A 9 3457NAK Front park turn signal lamp aba N A N A 2 To replace these lamps see your authorized dealer Q 9 211 2XB 3 NU pan bo PS Y 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Vehicle Care 281 GENERAL INFORMATION Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes CLEANING PRODUCTS For best result
368. or next to the fan icon Touch Rear again to close the rear controls Closing the rear climate control functions does not affect their current settings Recirculated air Touch to turn the recirculated air on or off which May reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior May help reduce odors from reaching the interior Engages automatically when MAX A C is selected May be engaged manually in any airflow mode except defrost May turn off in all airflow modes except MAX A C to reduce fog potential F MAX A C Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air Touch again for normal A C operation MAX A C eqn oo H Distributes air through instrument panel vents Is more economical and efficient than normal A C mode May help reduce odors from entering your vehicle A C Touch to turn the air conditioning on or off Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in MAX A C defrost and floor defrost AUTO Touch to engage automatic operation then set the temperature using the temperature control The system automatically controls Fan speed Airflow distribution A C on or off Outside or recirculated air I Rear defroster Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated mirrors 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 416 MyLincoln Touch J Defrost Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice Touch again to r
369. or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e n the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus All Wheel Drive If Equipped 175 Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand for an extended period of time This will cause the AWD system to overheat After the system has cooled down normal AWD function will return When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use L Low gear when possible L Low gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and o
370. or a new battery has been installed the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected Note Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner Follow your local authorized standards for disposal Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e Note If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset on
371. or their designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates supplements add on components or Internet based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE Supplemental Components 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 433 If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components then the terms of this EULA shall apply If MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent make available Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided then the terms of this EULA shall apply except that the MS Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component s shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component s FORD MOTOR COMPANY MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE e Links to Third Party Sites The MS SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the SOFTWARE The third party sites are not under the control of MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Neither MS nor Mic
372. oring system and should not be used However if you must use a sealant the tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer WARNING See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitoring sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Note The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full function of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the system sensors See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in this chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly then it is intended for temporary use only This means that
373. orward end is all the way up in the housing 2 Push in on the center of the outside edge of the filter and rotate up into the housing until it clips into position REAR SEATS WARNING To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts make sure that the safety belts are not buckled when folding the seat back 2 e Recline seat back With the seat occupied if pull the lever up to recline the seat back e Fold seat back With the seat empty pull the lever up to fold the seat back forward e Unfold seat back Rotate the seat back upward until the seat back latches in the upright position The seat back will click when it is locked into position 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 140 Seats EasyFold Folding Seat If Equipped 4 WARNING Make sure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down Folding the seat while occupied could result in damage to the seat or injury Note The power feature is operational when the vehicle is in park and the liftgate has been open for less than 10 minutes The control buttons are located on the left hand rear quarter trim panel accessible from the liftgate area e Fold seat back Press and hold the control mechanism to lower the seat back The top portion lowers the right 4096 seat back and the bottom portion lowers the left 6096 seat back e Unfold seat back Rotate the seat back upward until the seat back latches in the upright position
374. ossbar ends may just need to be slid back into position to regain proper function See your authorized dealer for proper moonroof or sunshade operating diagnostic or repair instructions Note If the moonroof is excessively operated the glass and shade motors will go into a fail safe jog mode manual intermittent operation to prevent overheating or damage to the motor The motors will return to normal operation after a period of idle time The moonroof and sunshade controls are located on the overhead console The moonroof and sunshade have a one touch open and close feature To stop motion during one touch operation press the control a second time 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Windows and Mirrors 101 Opening the Sunshade and Moonroof Note The moonroof will only open after sunshades are completely open Press and release the control to open the sunshade The front and rear sunshades open simultaneously Press and release the control to open the moonroof The moonroof will stop short of the fully opened position Note This position helps to reduce rumbling wind noise which may happen with the roof fully opened Press and release the control again to fully open Closing the Moonroof and Sunshades Note The sunshades will only close after the moonroof is completely closed Pull and release the control The moonroof will stop short of the fully closed position Pull the control again and
375. oving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission selector lever is in position P WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission selector lever in position P set the parking brake and block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 316 Wheels and Tires AN WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the 5 vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel AN WARNING Always use the jack provided as original equipment C5 with your vehicle If using a jack other than the one provided as original equipment with your vehicle make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight including any vehicle cargo or modifications Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 1 Park on a level surface set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers 2 Place the transmission selector lever in position P and turn the engine off 3 Lift the carpeted load floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle and remove the
376. owing The driver and adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat e Remove the obstruction s if found e Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated e If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system Do not attempt to repair or service the system Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this owner s manual 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 51 SIDE AIRBAGS WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seat backs of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deplo
377. p nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container WARNING Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 158 Fuel and Refueling Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to
378. per or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Note Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 130 Climate Control CABIN AIR FILTER Note A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter which is located just in front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of the vehicle The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle The particulate filtration system gives the following benefits to customers e mproves the customer s driving comfort by reducing particle concentration e Improves the interior compartment cleanliness e Protects the climate control components from particle deposits For more information regarding the interval at which you should replace the cabin air filter see the Scheduled Maintenance chapter For additional cabin air filt
379. plied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote Gracenote End User License Agreement EULA This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville California 94608 Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote s providers If so all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote Gracenote Content Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data except in a Tag associated with a music file to any t
380. pools use these lanes Note If your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the Start Route button the system defaults to the Fastest Route option and begins guidance During route guidance you can press the talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation corner green bar if you want the system to repeat route guidance information For example while driving on a route you press the button to find out when your next turn is the system displays a distance before the next turn If you press the button again before the turn the system displays an updated distance Point of Interest POI Categories Your system offers a variety if points of interest categories Main Categories Food Drink amp Dining Travel amp Transportation Shopping Financial Entertainment amp Arts Emergency Recreation amp Sports Community Health amp Medicine 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 420 MyLincoln Touch Within these main categories there are subcategories which contain more listings Personal Care Services Automobile Dealership Govt Office Public Transit Education To expand these listings press the in front of the point of interest listing The system also allows you to sort the points of interest alphabetically by distance or by cityseekr listings if available cityseekr If Available Note cityseekr point of interest information is limited to approximat
381. power steering pump fluid reservoir level below the MIN mark on the reservoir Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for a low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer Do not fill the power steering reservoir above the MAX mark as this may result in leaks from the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for an improperly inflated tire uneven tire wear loose or worn suspension components loose or worn steering components improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 210 Load Carrying CARGO NETS AN WARNING This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision or heavy braking The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area Attach the net to the anchors provided in one of the two configurations Repeat the attachment on both sides of the vehicle Type 1 X E 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Load Carrying 211 Type
382. pped move the transmission selector lever to position P and switch the ignition off 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 154 Starting and Stopping the Engine Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to restart the engine within 20 seconds of switching it off even if a valid key is not present Within 20 seconds of switching the engine vehicle off press the brake pedal and press the button After 20 seconds have expired you can no longer start the engine without the key present inside your vehicle Once the engine has started it remains running until you press the button even if the system does not detect a valid key If you open and close a door while the engine is running the system searches for a valid key You cannot start the engine if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds Your vehicle may have remote start capability Refer to Remote start in the Keys amd Remote Control chapter STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When the engine starts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Before starting the vehicle e Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts e Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set e Make sure the gearshift is in position P Some warning lights will briefly illuminate Note Do not touch the accelerator pedal
383. products to clean plastic parts e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft amp Bug and Tar Remover 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Vehicle Care 283 WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will grey or stain the parts over time REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motor
384. properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console e Objects hanging off the seat back e Objects stowed in the seat back map pocket Objects placed on the occupant s lap e Cargo interference with the seat e Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat e Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 50 Supplementary Restraints System The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the previous list To know if the front passenger sensing system is operating PAN properly see Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in this chapter If the airbag readiness light is lit do the foll
385. protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 269 WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service Note If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables f
386. pump relay O Not used Not used 22 Noetued Cd o oa Netued 25 Neused 29 Neused Cd Netued lo Noued 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Fuses 251 Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components m EE Blower motor Blower motor relay a 36 Rear seat relay SCREEN iiu lamps relay 88 Nouse 05 LEE dues ta Cei sa a po Notued 0 0 ABS valves as Sp Rearwasherreay Rain sensor PG Noted 4 Noted __________ 48 poo Notusda 4 po Notuseda s2 Notuseda sa pp Left TT stop turn lamps relay ps Notued A relay Not Notused EA MA a HID a en PBT loa Alternator sensor 6 Notuseda 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 252 Fuses Fuse or relay Fuse amp Protected components number rating 10A 15A 20A Powertrain control module PCM relay 15A 20A Vehicle power VPWR 2 15A VPWR 4 15A VPWR 1 70 10A EZ op Not used mo pp j Ntued 74 Not used 75 CYA clutch diode Not used 62 63 64 65 67 70 71 76 Not used rr park lamps relay Right HID headlamps po Notusa____ 81 JNoeused
387. r current location just say Business Search and then Search Near Me If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say Operator at any time within a Directions or Business search to speak with a live operator The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street intersections Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription For more information on Operator Assist visit www SYNCMyRide com support 2 Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination After the route download is finished the phone call automatically ends If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation e Turn by turn directions appear in the information display in the status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services screen You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts e When on an active route you can select Route Summary or Route Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA You can also turn voice guidance on or off cancel the route or update the route If you miss a turn SYNC automatically asks if you want the route updated Just say Yes when prompted and the system delivers a new route to your vehicle If your v
388. r conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around your vehicle e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions for example amateur radios medical equipment wireless headphones remote controls and alarm systems If the frequencies are jammed you will not be able to use your remote control You can lock and unlock the doors with the key 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Keys and Remote Control 57 Note Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended Note If you are in range the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally Intelligent Access The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions is met e You touch the inside of the front exterior door handle e You press the luggage compartment button e You press a button on the transmitter If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low it may be necessary to mechanically unlock your door You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation Refer to Remote Control in this chapter for more information on the location and use of the mechanical key blade REMOTE CONTROL Intelligent Access
389. r sensing system If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for about five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature The driver s and front The Belt Minder feature will not passenger s safety belts are activate buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt is not the safety belt warning light buckled when the vehicle illuminates and the warning chime has reached at least 6 mph sounds for six seconds every 9 7 km h and 1 2 minutes 25 seconds repeating for about have elapsed since the ignition five minutes or until the safety belts switch has been turned to on are buckled The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light unbuckled for about one illuminates and the warning chime minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every traveling at least 6 mph 25 seconds repeating for about 9 7 km h and more than five minutes or until the safety belts 1 2 minutes have elapsed since are buckled the ignition switch has been turned to on 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 40 Safety Belts Deactivating and Activating the Belt Mind
390. ranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask your dealer for details PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what is not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U S and Canada It is the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair Rental Car Reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you are ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense rei
391. rd Printing USA fus Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEacE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Scheduled Maintenance 343 SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated If you occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance For specific recommendations see your dealership service advisor or technician Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display Example 1 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28751 miles 46270 kilometers perform the 30000 mile 48000 kilometer automatic transmission fluid replacement Example 2 The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on but the odometer reads 30000 miles 48000 kilometers perform the engine air filter replacement i e Intelligent Oil Life Monitor was reset at 25000 miles 40000 kilometers Towing a Trailer or Using a Camper or Car top Carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services lis
392. rd Printing USA fus 398 MyLincoln Touch Travel Link Voice Commands Sports schedule Weather map If you have said Sports headlines Sports schedule or Sports scores you may say any of the commands in the Sports headlines Sports schedules and Sports scores commands chart If you have said Travel Link you may say any of the commands in the Travel Link chart Sports Headlines Sports Schedules and Sports Scores Voice Commands College basketball Motor pom A TRAVEL LINK B day weather Golf schedule NBA scores forecast Baseball headlines MLS headlines NFL headlines Baseball schedule MLS schedule NFL schedule Baseball scores headlines College basketball Motor sports order NHL schedule College basketball Motor sports scores schedule College football Movie listings Traffic schedule College football My teams schedule Weather map scores pom eee WNBA headlines Golf headlines NBA headlines WNBA schedule Golf leaderboard NBA schedule WNBA scores 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 399 Alerts Press the Information button gt Alerts 2 e View the message e Delete the message e Delete All messages This screen displays any system messages suc
393. rd Printing USA fus 414 MyLincoln Touch To access Help using the voice commands press the voice button then after the tone say Help The system provides allowable voice commands for the current mode CLIMATE Press the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate control features Depending on your vehicle line and option package your climate screen may look different from the screen shown here A Power Touch to switch the system off and on Outside air cannot enter your vehicle when you switch off the system B Passenger settings Touch DUAL to switch on the passenger temperature control Touch or to adjust the temperature Touch the heated seat icon to control the heated seat Touch the cooled seat icon to control the cooled seat Fan speed Touch or to adjust fan speed Q o o o MyLincoln Touch 415 D Rear Touch to access the rear climate control Rear climate control settings appear at the bottom of the screen e ee e e 17 Touch the power icon to turn the rear climate control functions off and on Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate settings Touch it again to prevent the rear seat passengers from adjusting the settings Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust the rear climate settings Touch or to adjust the temperature To adjust fan speed touch
394. rd Printing USA fus Safety Belts 33 WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided The safety belt system consists of e lap and shoulder safety belts e shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode except driver safety belt e height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions e safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions e belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position P e safety belt warning light and chime See Safety belt warning T light and indicator chime later in this chapter o E crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness t indicator See Crash sensors and airbag indicator in the Supplemental Restraint System chapter The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers The safety belt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occ
395. rfill occurs excess fluid should be removed by an authorized E dealer Note An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components BRAKE FLUID CHECK Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Check the power steering fluid Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 268 Maintenance 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MI
396. riety of tasks on your work computer home computer and your in vehicle system In track mode the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files play regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system only plays the mp3 files in the current folder 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Audio System 125 AM FM CD PREMIUM AUDIO SYSTEM C A WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving Note The MyLincoln Touch system controls most of the audio features See the MyLincoln Touch chapter for more information A SEEK Reverse and Fast Forward e In radio mode select a frequency band and press one of these buttons The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction e n SIRIUS mode press these buttons to select the previous or next channel If a specific category is selected such as Jazz Rock or News use these buttons to find the previous or next ch
397. ring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How Does the Personal Safety System Work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module During a crash the restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Supplementary Restraints System 43 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION WARNING Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module WARNING All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided WARNING Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child
398. rmarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction or wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the Advance Trac system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac system activates SLOW DOWN The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system helps you keep control of your vehicle when on a s
399. rn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 237 Preparing Your Vehicle Note Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle Note Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 1 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 2 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 3 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus
400. rol 222 checking and adding fluid 268 Transmission replacing wiper blades 271 272 brake shift interlock BSI Wrecker towing 227 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus
401. rom the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time To ensure proper operation of the battery management system BMS any electrical devices that are added to the vehicle should not have their ground connection made directly at the negative battery post A connection at the negative battery post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle When a battery replacement is required the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 270 Maintenance When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the automatic transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy As a result of this the transmission may shift firmly when first driven This operation is considered normal and will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel If the battery has been disconnected
402. rosoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their designated agent are responsible for i the contents of any third party sites any links contained in third party sites or any changes or updates to third party sites or ii webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites those links are provided to you only as a convenience and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by MS Microsoft Corporation their affiliates and or their designated agent Obligation to Drive Responsibly You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road You will read and abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the DEVICE UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip CD ROM disk s or via web download or other means and is labeled For Upgrade Purposes Only or For Recovery Purposes Only you may install one 1 copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE and use it in accordance with this EULA including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 434 Appendices INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS All title and i
403. ross vehicle weight rating not the gross combined weight rating Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds 680 kilograms when loaded 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Towing 225 Trailer Lamps WARNING Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle s tail lamp wiring this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation Additional electrical equipment may be required Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Before Towing a Trailer Practice turning stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle trailer combination before starting on a trip When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles When Towing a Trailer e Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 kilometers e Do not make full throttle starts e Check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles 80 kilometers e When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather place the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A C performance e Turn off the speed control
404. rs on the front and back of the mirror Mirror performance may be affected A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are detected from behind your vehicle It will automatically return to normal reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear view when backing up SUN VISORS Slide On Rod Rotate the visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra sunlight coverage Retract the visor before moving it back toward the windshield and storing it Lift the cover to switch on the lamp 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 100 Windows and Mirrors PANORAMIC VISTA ROOF AND POWER SUNSHADES IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not let children play with the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves WARNING When closing the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the panoramic Vista Roof and power sunshade opening Note Do not attempt to move the sunshades manually or sunshade damage or malfunction may occur The sunshade track clips are designed to release the sunshade crossbar in order to prevent damage to the system If this occurs the sunshade cr
405. rse sensing system Rearview camera Blind spot monitor Rear heated seat module Climate control lamps Restraints control module Not used spare Fog lamps relay LED signal mirrors Breaker 49 Delayed accessory relay 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Maintenance 257 GENERAL INFORMATION Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle To help you service your vehicle we provide Scheduled Maintenance Information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle Precautions e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an
406. s The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 294 Wheels and Tires Temperature A B C WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Glossary of Tire Terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the ve
407. s Center Seating Use Note The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 inches 28 centimeters center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches 46 centimeters apart A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation
408. s or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage WARNING The dipstick cap and surrounding components may be hot gloves are recommended 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 30 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow a minimum of 10 seconds for each gear to engage 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 266 Maintenance 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Under hood overview in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube by turning it to the locked position 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal operating temperature Low fluid level MIN KS If the fluid level is below the MIN E MIN seso MAX ss range of the dipstick add fluid to 4 reach the hash mark level Note If the fluid level is below the MIN level do not drive the vehicle An underfill condition may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be check
409. s use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft amp Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft amp Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft amp Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft amp Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft amp Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft amp Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft amp Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft amp Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft amp Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid Canada only CXC 37 A B D or F Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft amp Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd
410. s and inspections should be performed every month or at six month intervals Check Every Month Engine oil level Function of all interior and exterior lights Tires including spare for wear and proper pressure Windshield washer fluid level Check Every Six Months Battery connections Clean if necessary Body and door drain holes for obstructions Clean if necessary Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength Door weatherstrips for wear Lubricate if necessary Hinges latches and outside locks for proper operation Lubricate if necessary Parking brake for proper operation Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function Safety warning lamps brake ABS airbag safety belt for operation Washer spray and wiper operation Clean or replace blades as necessary 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance 335 Multi point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems Ford Motor Company recommends the following multi point inspection be performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great Accessory drive belt s Battery performance Engine air filter Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage Fluid levels
411. s at one end and a RCA jack at the other Switch off the engine radio and portable music player Set the parking brake and put the transmission in position P 2 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end into the adapter in one of the two left A V input jacks white or red inside the center console 3 Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen Select either a tuned FM station or a CD if there is a CD already loaded into the system 4 Adjust the volume as desired 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 15 the maximum 6 Press the lower left corner on the touchscreen Select the A V In tab You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the controls In order to playback video from your iPod or iPhone if compatible you must have a special combination USB RCA composite video cable which you can buy from Apple amp When the cable is connected to your iPod or iPhone plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 384 MyLincoln Touch Troubleshooting Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output The jack only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volu
412. s later in this section Note You can program a maximum of three devices To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed you must first erase the current settings See Erasing the function button codes later in this section The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the driver s sun visor The system includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices with the home As well as being programmed for garage doors the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting Additional system information can be found on line at www homelink com or by calling the toll free help line on 1 800 355 3515 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 144 Universal Garage Door Opener Programming Note Put a new battery in the hand held transmitter This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 With your vehicle parked outside of the garage and your key in the ignition turn the key so that the ignition is in the on position 2 Hold your hand held garage A door transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 centimeters away from the HomeLink button you want to program 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold th
413. s that secure the air y filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the ie air filter housing i 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 274 Maintenance Vertical Aim Adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height 3 Turn on the low beam h
414. s were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was travelling e Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel if equipped This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Note EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information e g name gender age and crash location is recorded see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic Directions and Information privacy below However parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have such special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of
415. seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 feet 3 66 meters away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet 3 66 meters away from the tire wheel assembly 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 305 Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing the system is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system or some component of the system may be damaged Safety Practices WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand do not rapidly spin the tires Spinning the tires can tear t
416. seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction FUEL QUALITY Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Choosing the Right Fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 15 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel fuel fuel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the emission control system The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law Octane Recommendations Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 is recommended Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular ee with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Do not us
417. service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle Additionally when your vehicle is in for service or repair Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes For U S only if equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See the SYNC chapter for more information 9n12 MK y 2013 MKX Ownei IICA fric U SA TUS mkx Ja nf rol Drintinn de gf 3rd Printing 12 Introduction Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belt
418. silent Internet Data If compatible with your phone you can adjust Connection your internet data connection Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect never connect when roaming or query on connect Press for more information Manage Phonebook _ Access features such as automatic phonebook download re download your phonebook add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 411 Wireless amp Internet Your system has a Wi Fi feature that creates a wireless network within your vehicle thereby allowing other devices such as personal computers or phones in your vehicle to speak to each other share files or play games Using this Wi Fi feature everyone in your vehicle can also gain access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection inside your vehicle your phone supports personal area networking and if you park outside a wireless hotspot Press the Settings icon Settings Wireless amp Internet then select from the following Wi Fi Settings Wi Fi Network Client Mode turns the Wi Fi feature on and off in your vehicle Make sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes Choose a Wireless Network
419. sitivity setting The wipers will continue to wipe as long as moisture is detected 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 88 Wipers and Washers This feature can be turned on or off using the information display Keep the outside of the windshield clean especially the area around the interior mirror where the sensor is located or sensor performance may be affected WINDSHIELD WASHERS Note Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Press the end of the stalk to activate the washer e A brief press causes the wipers to swipe three times with washer fluid e Along press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid This feature can be turned on and off in the information display REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Rotate the control to select 2 Intermittent operation shortest pause between wipes 1 Intermittent operation longest pause between wipes 0 Off Rotate and hold the control to either the top or bottom position to activate the rear washer The control will return to the 2 or 0 position when
420. sors are Blocked blocked Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve Cross Traffic System Displayed when a fault with the cross traffic Fault alert system has occurred Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Vehicle Coming Displayed when the blind spot information From X system with cross traffic alert CTA system is operating and senses a vehicle 27 ERES oc Messages AA brake system should be inspected immediately Check Brake System Displayed when the brake system needs servicing If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 118 Information Displays Brake System Action Description Messages Park Brake Engaged Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible System Messages Collision Warn Not Displayed when there is a system malfunction Available with the collision warning system The system will be disabled Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Collision Warn Not Displayed when the collision warning system Available Sensor radar is blocked because of poor radar Blocked visibility due to bad weather or ice mud water in front of the radar Driver can typically clean the sensor to res
421. station number when prompted Press Enter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 365 HD Radio Information If Available Note HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM FM radio Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts where available in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free crystal clear audio and no static or distortion For more information and a guide to available stations and programming please visit www hdradio com When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology you may notice the following indicators on your screen HD logo blinks when acquiring a digital station and stays solid H5 when digital audio is playing When this logo is available you may also see Title and Artist fields on screen Multicast indicator appears in FM mode only if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts Other multicast stations HD2 through HD7 are only available digitally TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an
422. system s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation PE To close with the rear cargo area control Press and release the button WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch Obstacle Detection When closing The system will reverse to full open when it detects an obstacle A chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to reopen Remove the obstacle to close the liftgate Note Entering the vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause the vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection To prevent this allow the power liftgate to fully close before entering the vehicle Before driving off check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message and or warning indicator Driving off without first checking for the liftgate or door ajar message and or warning indicator could result in the liftgate being left open unintentionally while you are driving When opening The system will stop and a chime will sound three times when it detects an obstacle Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate Resetting the Power Liftgate The liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if any of these conditions occur e a low voltage or dead battery e disconnected battery e the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar unlatched To reset the power liftgate 1 Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then reconnect the battery 2 Manually close and fully latch the liftgate
423. t 8 m every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion Removing Vehicle from Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage do the following e Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build up on window surfaces e Check windshield wipers for any deterioration e Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage mice squirrel nests e Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label Check brake pedal operation Drive the vehicle 15 feet 4 5 meters back and forth to remove rust build up Check fluid levels including coolant oil and gas to make sure there are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels e If the battery was removed clean the battery cable ends and inspect Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 290 Wheels and Tires GENERAL INFORMATION Important Information for P265 40R22 Low profile Tires and Wheels Note Your vehicle s warranty does not cover these types of damage Tires should always be kept at the correct inflation pressures and extra caution should be taken when operating on rough roads to avoid impacts that could cause wheel and tire damage If your vehicle is equipped with P265 40R22 tires they are low profile tires These tires an
424. t snugly near the center of the shoulder The following drawings compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips NS If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 24 Child Safety INSTALLING CHILD SEATS Using Lap and Shoulder Belts WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restra
425. t remains on while the transmission is in D Drive and N Neutral If shifted out of D Drive or N Neutral the system enters CTA mode Once shifted back into D Drive BLISO turns back on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph 5 km h Note BLIS does not function in R Reverse or P Park or provide any additional warning when a turn signal is on CTA detects approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet 14 meters away though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked Reversing slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness WARNING To help avoid personal injury NEVER use the CTA system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking space CTA is not a replacement for careful driving and only an assist In this first example the left sensor is only partially obstructed zone coverage is nearly maximized 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 202 Driving Aids Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles Here the left sensor is mostly obstructed zone coverage on that side is severely limited System Lights and Messages The BLIS and CTA systems illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror on the side of the vehicle the approaching vehicle is coming from Note The alert indicator dims when the headlamp switch is not in the off position and nighttime darkness is detecte
426. t your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat build up and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure ev
427. ta is a commercial item as that term is defined at 48 C F R FAR 2 101 is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following Notice of Use and be treated in accordance with such Notice NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER NAME NAVTEQ CONTRACTOR MANUFACTURER SUPPLIER ADDRESS 425 West Randolph Street Chicago IL 60606 This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under which this Data was provided 2011 NAVTEQ All rights reserved 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Appendices 447 If the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein the Contracting Officer federal government agency or any federal official must notify NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data Wi Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 92013 JiWire Gracenote Copyright CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 9 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 9 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 45 987 525 16 061 680 46 154 773 16 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 36 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services sup
428. tart to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 178 All Wheel Drive If Equipped Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti lock brake system ABS do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replace
429. tch completely and release The window will fully open or close Press or lift it again to stop the window Global Opening Note The ignition must be off and the accessory delay feature must not be activated to operate this feature Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control to begin opening the front windows and venting the moonroof if equipped Release the button once motion starts The windows and moonroof will continue opening Press the lock or unlock button on the remote control to stop motion Bounce Back The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 96 Windows and Mirrors Overriding the Bounce Back Feature 4 WARNING When you override the bounce back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window reaching the bounce back position The window will travel up with no bounce back protection The window will stop if you release the switch before the window is fully closed Accessory Delay You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door Window Lock A Unlock B Lock Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior
430. te ski conditions and see scores to current sports games 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 397 Press the Information button gt Sirius Travel Link and then 2 choose from any of the following services When you select Identify traffic incidents on your route nearby your vehicle s current location or near any of your favorite places Gf programmed Fuel Prices View fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle s location or on an active navigation route times if available Weather View the nearby weather current weather or the five day forecast for the chosen area Select Map to see the weather map which can show storms radar information charts and winds Select Area to select from a listing of weather locations Sports Info View scores and schedules from a variety of sports You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress Ski Conditions View ski conditions for a specific area SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands Note In order to use SIRIUS Travel Link your vehicle must be equipped with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot EE Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the us following Travel Link Voice Commands 5 day weather forecast Movie listings Travel Link Sports headlines 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3
431. ted in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently Inspect and lubricate U joints Exceptions 48000 km 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 344 Scheduled Maintenance Extensive Idling or Low speed Driving for Long Distances as in Heavy Commercial Use i e Delivery Taxi Patrol Car or Livery As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart Inspect frequently Replace cabin air filter if equipped service as required Replace engine air filter 48000 km Every 60000 miles Replace spark plugs 96000 km Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads Inspect frequently Replace cabin air filter if equipped service as required Replace engine air filter 8000 km abnormal noise wear looseness or drag measure tread depth Every 5000 miles Change engine oil and filter noth months Every 30000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid 48000 km Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See the Instrument Cluster chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance Special Operating Condition Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cope Hours
432. tems listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Illumination of the service engine soon indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 164 Fuel and Refueling An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty informati
433. tems noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that still need servicing 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 403 Making a Report If you want to run a report by using the touchscreen touch the 2 Information button gt Apps gt Vehicle Health Report EE To run a report by voice command press the voice button on i the steering wheel and when prompted say Vehicle health report Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice When you create a Vehicle Health Report Ford Motor Company may collect your cellular phone number to process your report request and diagnostic information about your vehicle Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information Ford may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose If you do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www SYNCMyRide com See www SYNCMyRide com Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement for more information SETTINGS Under this menu you can set your clock access and adjust the display sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for specific modes or the help feature Clock Note You cannot manually set the date Your vehicle s GPS does this for you Note If the battery has been disconnected your vehicle needs to acquire
434. ter in this section Settings 2013 MKX mkx Access various phone settings such turning Bluetooth on and off managing your phonebook and more See Phone settings later in this section Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 388 MyLincoln Touch Text Messaging Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features Note Certain features in text messaging are speed dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph 5 km h Note SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth read them aloud and translate text messaging acronyms such as LOL 1 Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu 2 Select Messaging 3 Choose from the following e Listen speaker icon e Dial e Send Text e View e Delete Composing a Text Message Note This is a speed dependent feature It is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 5 mph 8 km h Note Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are phone dependent features Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu Touch Messaging gt Send Text Enter a phone number or choose from your phone book You can select from the following options e Send which sends the message as it is e Edit Text allows you to customize the pre defined message or create a message
435. that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information Ford strongly recommends the use of only genuine Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are engineered for your vehicle Additives and Chemicals Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in the owner manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual Additional chemicals or additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as part of normal maintenance Please consult your warranty information 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 334 Scheduled Maintenance Oils Fluids and Flushing In many cases fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and by itself does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed However discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your dealership Your vehicle s oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub systems during scheduled maintenance It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford approved flushing chemical Owner Checks and Services Certain basic maintenance check
436. the Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyKey 63 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as an administrator key or admin key which can be used to e create a restricted key e program optional MyKey settings e clear all MyKey features altogether Once a key has been programmed you can access the following information using the information display control e How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle e The total distance the vehicle has been driven with a MyKey For vehicles equipped with intelligent access push button start when both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key fob are present the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to start the engine Standard Settings These settings cannot be changed e Belt Minder This cannot be disabled and the five minute timer does not expire The audio system is muted when MyKey Belt Minder is activated e Early low fuel Warnings are displayed in the information display control followed by an audible tone when the fuel tank is at 1 8 tank or less e Driver assist features if equipped on your vehicle are forced on rear parking ai
437. the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others Note Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 160 Fuel and Refueling When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 1 Locate the white plastic funnel in the spare tire compartment 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel A system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel REFUELING WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places
438. the transmission out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the camera image remains in the display until the vehicle speed reaches 6 mph 10 km h This occurs when the rear camera delay feature is on or until a radio button is selected Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 190 Cruise Control PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal USING CRUISE CONTROL 4 WARNING Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Note Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a steep hill Apply the brakes if your vehicle speed increases above the set speed while driving downhill Note Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed while driving uphill The cruise controls are located on 3 ll i v the steering wheel Switching Cruise Control On Press the ON control up and release The indicator will appear in the instrument cluster Setting a Speed 1 Accelerate to the desired speed 2 Press the SET control upward and release 3 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus
439. the warning light illuminates the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking This may be apparent to the driver The system does not automatically activate the brakes but if the brake pedal is pressed full force braking is applied even if the brake pedal is lightly pressed Using the Collision Warning System A WARNING The collision warning system s brake support can only help reduce the speed at which a collision occurs if the driver applies the vehicle s brakes The brake pedal must be pressed just like any typical braking situation The warning system and chime can be turned on and off separately the warning system sensitivity can be adjusted to one of three possible settings by using the information display control Refer to the Information Displays chapter Note If the system cannot be turned off in a vehicle equipped with MyKey refer to the MyKey chapter Note If collision warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning sensitivity can be reduced though the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings Refer to the Information Displays chapter for instructions on reducing the sensitivity 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Driving Aids 207 Blocked Sensors If a message regarding a blocked sensor appears in the information display the radar si
440. their edges only Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge Do not clean in a circular motion Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods MP3 Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks and folder structures work as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder T001 track to F253 T255 e Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create While various files may be present files with extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension are played other files are ignored by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a va
441. ting Memory from the Transmitter To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 button for five seconds A tone will sound when the memory store is done Continue to hold until a second tone is heard 2 Within three seconds press the unlock button on the remote control 3 Repeat this procedure for each additional transmitter if desired Car Finder Press the button twice within three seconds The horn will sound al and the turn signals will flash We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a Panic Alarm Press the button to activate the alarm Press the button again or switch the ignition on to deactivate Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off Remote Start WARNING To avoid exhaust fumes do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated Note Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle has remote start if the transmitter has this button The remote start feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside your vehicle The transmitter has an extended operating range Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started See the Climate Control chapter for more information A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when your vehicle was last turned off Many states an
442. tings Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise wear looseness or drag Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles 16000 kilometers between service intervals Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change See the nstrument Cluster chapter 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Scheduled Maintenance 339 Additional Maintenance Items Replace cabin air filter if equipped 32000 km Replace engine air filter 48000 km Change engine coolant 160000 km Every 100000 miles Replace spark plugs 160000 km Inspect accessory drive belt s Every 150000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid 240000 km Replace accessory drive belt s if not replaced within the last 100000 miles 160000 km Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles 4800 kilometers of the last oil change Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles 160000 kilometers then every three years or 50000 miles 80000 kilometers After initial inspection inspect every other oil change until replaced 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 340 Scheduled Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Log Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE Dearer VALIDATION P amp A Cone Houns MiLEAGE
443. tion Description Traction Control Messages Service AdvanceTrac Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Traction control off Displayed when the traction control has been disabled by the driver Trailer Sway Reduce Displayed when the trailer sway control has Speed detected trailer sway Alarm Security Action Description Messages To Stop Alarm Start Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is Vehicle armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the driver s side door In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering the ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 116 Information Displays AWD Off Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re installed or after the system is allowed to cool Check AWD Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control Transmission AWD light when the AWD system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Battery and Action Description
444. tion These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams and data fields are accurate 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 368 MyLincoln Touch Potential Station Issues Issue Cause Action Echo stutter skip or repeat in audio Increase or decrease in audio volume Sound fading or blending in and out There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3 multicast preset or Direct Tune Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune Text information does not match currently playing audio There is no text information shown for currently selected frequency HD2 HD7 stations not found when Scan is pressed This is poor time alignment by the radio broadcaster The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio The digital multicast is not available until the HD Radio broadcast is decoded Once decoded the audio is available The previously stored multicast preset or direct tune is not available in your current reception area Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Data service issue by the radio broadcaster Pressing Scan disables HD2 HD7 channel search No action required This is a broadcast issue No action required The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive No action required This is normal behavior Wait until the audio is available No action required
445. tion you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well being or survival of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications especially in more remote geographical areas TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE WHETHER STATUTORY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties so this limitation may not apply to you 5 Limitation of Liability TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES INCLUDING IN EACH CASE BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA LOSS OF DATA LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guid
446. to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions such as crash severity belt usage were not appropriate to activate these safety devices e Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal crashes not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the crash causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration e The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal near frontal and side crashes and in rollovers e Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact crashes not rollovers rear impacts frontal or near frontal crashes unless the crash causes sufficient lateral deceleration e The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal crashes unless the crash causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 56 Keys and Remote Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The remote con
447. trol allows you to e remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors e remotely open the power liftgate e remotely start or stop the engine e arm and disarm the anti theft system e activate the panic alarm e activate the global open windows Intelligent Access Your vehicle will allow you to unlock and enter your vehicle without actively using a key or remote control You can use this feature at the front doors or at the liftgate or trunk You can activate the intelligent access feature as long as you have one of your intelligent access keys within range of the front doors or the liftgate or trunk GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weathe
448. upant s body when activated This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal crashes the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the crash is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 34 Safety Belts FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle button and remove the tongue from the buckle 2 To unfasten press the release a When in use the rear outboard safety belts can be used with the comfort guides This guide is attached to the head restraint and is stored in a pocket in the seat back 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Safety Belts 35 Restraint of Pregnant Women To adjust the comfort guide 1 Slip the shoulder belt into the belt guide 2 Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is centered on the occupant s shoulder WARNING Always ride and drive with your seat back upright and the safety belt properly fastened The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips The shoulder portion of the safet
449. ur vehicle To avoid unlocking the door inadvertently be sure to only touch the lock sensor and not other areas of the door handle At the Liftgate Press the exterior liftgate release button on the top of the liftgate pull cup handle 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Locks 71 Smart Unlocks The smart unlock feature is intended to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle s passenger compartment or rear cargo area When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door lock control with the door open transmission is in P and ignition off after you close the door the vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment If an intelligent access key is found inside your vehicle all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn will chirp indicating that the intelligent access key is inside In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle you can lock your vehicle after all doors are closed by using the keyless entry keypad pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key or touching the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand Refer to SecuriCode Keyless Entry Keypad in this chapter for more information on keyless entry keypad operation When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicl
450. urt action Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford is then bound by the decision and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard Suite 600 Arlington Virginia 22201 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 244 Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to f
451. us Starting and Stopping the Engine 151 GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes If you disconnect the battery your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles 8 kilometers after you connect it This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine You may disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting your vehicle avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine KEYLESS STARTING Note The keyless starting system may not functio
452. us off the road Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving encourage the use of voice operated systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 353 When using SYNC e Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken split or damaged Place cords and cables out of the way so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals seats compartments or safe driving abilities e Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage See your device s user guide for further information e Do not attempt to service or repair the system See your authorized dealer For your safety some SYNC functions are speed dependent Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph 5 km h Make sure that you review your device s user guide before using it with SYNC Speed restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary e Screens that are too crowded with information such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores movie times and ski c
453. vailable stations Scroll and select the desired station You can also lock or skip unwanted channels or view the song and artist on other stations Satellite Radio Voice Commands E If you are listening to SIRIUS satellite radio press the voice i amp button on the steering wheel control When prompted say any of the commands in the following chart If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio press the voice button and after the tone say Sirius then any of the commands in the following chart 0 233 SAT 2 If you have said Sports game see the following Sports game chart If you have said Tune see the following Tune chart SPORTS GAME Tune to the college name game Tune to the team city game gt Tune to the lt team city gt lt team name gt game Tune to the lt team name gt game 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus MyLincoln Touch 373 lt 0 233 gt SAT 1 SAT 9 SAT 3 preset lt gt SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription based satellite radio 4 om service
454. vehicle The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off your tire pressure still needs to be checked When Your Temporary Spare Tire Is Installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information see Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this section 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Wheels and Tires 311 When You Believe Your System Is Not Operating Properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system Low tire Possible cause Customer action required pressure warning light Solid warning Tire s 1 Make sure tires are at the proper light under inflated pressure Se
455. vehicle as a result of the failure of non Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty For additional information see the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Introduction 15 SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty see the warranty information that is provided to you along with your owner s manual Special Instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the Supplementary Restraints System chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However you must not compromise your own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile communication equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable em
456. vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations The lead vehicle graphic will not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Cruise Control 197 Detection issues can occur A A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front B With vehicles that edge into your qi lane The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully B into your lane C There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a Gam i bend or curve in the road In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly You should stay alert and intervene when necessary If the front end of your vehicle is hit or damaged the radar sensing zone may be altered causing missed or false vehicle detections See your authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation Adaptive Cruise Control Not Available Several conditions exist which can cause the system to deactivate or prevent the system from activating when requested These conditions include e a blocked sensor e high brake temperature e a failure in the system or a related system 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 198 Cruise Control Blocked Sensor WARNING Do not use ACC when towing a trailer with brake controls Aftermarket trailer brakes will
457. ves to break higher than 6 inches 15 centimeters above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e Causing internal damage to the components e Affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or other axle repair is required 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Towing 227 If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly or by any other means Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle It is acceptable to have your front wheel drive vehicle towed from the front if using proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels off the ground When towing in this manner the rear wheels can remain on the ground
458. w deflectors e Splash guards Interior style e Ambient lighting e Sport pedals e Floor mats e Rear seat entertainment Lifestyle e Ash cup coin holder e Cross bars and roof rails e Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories e Cargo organization and management e Roof rack and carriers e SUV camping tent e Cargo net Peace of mind e Vehicle security e Locking fuel plug 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 328 Accessories Cargo security shade Cargo area protector Bumper protector Wheel locks Hitch mounted parking sensors Lincoln Licensed Accessories are warranted by the accessory manufacturer s warranty Lincoln Licensed Accessories are fully designed and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer s limited warranty and or a copy of the Lincoln Licensed Accessories product limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight i
459. way e oncoming vehicles in the same lane WARNING Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 192 Cruise Control WARNING Do not use in poor visibility specifically fog rain spray or snow Note It is your responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times The system will automatically adjust your speed to maintain a proper distance between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane You can select from one of four GAP settings The controls are located on the steering wheel At startup the system sets the gap to the last selected setting Once activated you can deactivate the system at any time by pressing the brake pedal pressing the steering wheel ON OFF control or pressing the RES CNCL control In addition you can temporarily increase the vehicle speed above the current speed by manually pressing on the accelerator pedal alle i v Setting Adaptive Cruise Control The controls for using your cruise control are located on the steering wheel 1 Press and release ON The information display will show the gray indicator light current gap setting and SET 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press SET upward and release The vehicle speed is stored in the memory 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3r
460. will flash and sound the horn up to a total of 10 times when e any door the hood or the luggage compartment is opened without using the keypad the remote control or the intelligent access transmitter e the ignition is turned on with an invalid key Take all keys and remote controls to your authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle Arming the Alarm The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off Lock the vehicle to arm the alarm The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate the alarm is in the pre armed mode and will become fully armed in 20 seconds Once fully armed any intelligent access keys found inside the vehicle may be disabled and will not start the engine Press the remote control unlock button to re enable them Disarming the Alarm To disarm the alarm do any of the following e Press the power door unlock button within the 20 second pre armed mode will e Press the unlock button on the remote control Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad e Enter the vehicle using intelligent access e Press the panic button on the remote control The alarm system will still be armed but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding Note If the driver s door is unlocked with a key a chime will sound when you open the door and a message will appear in the information display You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm usi
461. y Compliance Certification Label affixed to either the door hinge pillar door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post next to the driver s seating position or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle transfer case or power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING To reduce the risk of serious injury when mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead
462. y also affect the function of the sensing system this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the sensing system WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system may create false beeps Note Keep the sensors located on the bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt If the sensors are covered the system s accuracy can be affected Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects Note If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of the bumper area The system turns on automatically whenever the ignition is switched on When receiving a detection warning the radio volume is reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio volume returns to the previous level 2013 MKX mkx
463. y belt should be positioned across the chest Pregnant women should also follow this practice See the following figure 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Pregnant women should always wear their safety belts The lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt should be positioned low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow The shoulder belt should be positioned to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest 36 Safety Belts Safety Belt Locking Modes WARNING After any vehicle crash the safety belt system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the nor
464. ying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seat back WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seat backs of the front seats In certain lateral crashes the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 52 Supplementary Restraints System The system consists of the following e a tag on the seat back indicating that side airbags are found on your vehicle side
465. you release it When you select reverse gear the rear wiper will switch on to intermittent if the front wipers are activated This feature may be enabled or disabled in the information display 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus Lighting 89 LIGHTING CONTROL A Off B Parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps C Headlamps High Beams 4 Push the lever forward to switch the high beams on Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off Headlamp Flasher ePull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate Y AUTOLAMPS A WARNING In severe weather conditions it may be necessary to switch your headlamps on manually Note If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the windshield wiper rainlamp feature When the windshield wipers are turned to low or high speed wiping during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off 2013 MKX mkx Owners Guide gf 3rd Printing USA fus 90 Lighting The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The headlamps will remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off You can adjust the time delay using the message c

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"